Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG GT C Roadster Car User Manual

Mercedes-AMG GT Roadster

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle

Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your

vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").

Booklet inside the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-

media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet

You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Digital form as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple

App store or Google

Play.

Apple® iOS Android™

Order no. P190 0414 13 Part no. 190 584 70 04 Edition A2019

É1905847004KËÍ

1905847004

Mercedes-AMG GT Roadster

Publication details

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the

following websites:

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or

otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-

out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstraße 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

Symbols

Registered trademarks:

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG Inc.

DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

Dolby

and MLP™ are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.

BabySmart™, ESP

and PRE-SAFE

are reg-

istered trademarks of Daimler AG.

HomeLink

is a registered trademark of John-

son Controls.

iPod

and iTunes

are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.

Burmester

is a registered trademark of

Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.

Microsoft

and Windows media

are regis-

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

SIRIUS

is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.

HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.

Gracenote

is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

ZAGAT Survey

and related brands are regis-

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-

lowing symbols:

WARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangers

which could pose a threat to your health or

life, or to the health and life of others.

Environmental note

Environmental notes provide you with infor-

mation on environmentally aware actions or

disposal.

Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-

cle.

Practical tips or further information that

could be helpful to you.

This symbol indicates an instruction

that must be followed.

Several of these symbols in succession

indicate an instruction with several

steps.

page)

This symbol tells you where you can find

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Adjusting lumbar support .................. 86

Adjusting the volume

Multimedia system ........................ 210

After-sales service center

see ASSYST PLUS

Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 52

Display message ............................ 184

Front air bag (driver, front

passenger) ....................................... 46

Head bag ......................................... 47

Important safety notes .................... 45

Introduction ..................................... 45

Knee bag .......................................... 46

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 48

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ............................................... 41

Side impact air bag .......................... 47

Air vents

Adjusting the blower setting of

AIRSCARF vents ............................. 108

Important safety notes .................. 107

Setting ........................................... 107

Setting the side air vents ............... 108

Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 89

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

AIRSCARF

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90

Switching on/off .............................. 89

AIRSCARF vents

Adjusting the blower setting .......... 108

Alarm

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 64

Switching off (ATA) .......................... 64

Switching the function on/off

(ATA) ................................................ 64

Index

Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMG

Adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem ................................................ 147

E-SELECT lever .............................. 117

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 170

Performance Seat ............................ 87

SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-gear sport

transmission .................................. 117

AMG ceramic brakes .........................133

AMG high-performance and

ceramic brakes .................................. 133

AMG sports exhaust system ............ 114

Animals

see Pets in the vehicle

Anti-entrapment function

see Reversing feature

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains

see Snow chains

Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 221

Assistance display (on-board com-

puter) ..................................................167

Assistance menu (on-board com-

puter) ..................................................168

Assistance system

see Driving systems

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........241

Hiding a service message .............. 241

Resetting the service interval dis-

play ................................................ 241

Service message ............................ 240

Special service requirements ......... 241

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 64

Function ...........................................64

Switching off the alarm .................... 64

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating ................. 168

Display message ............................ 189

Function/notes ............................. 154

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 186

see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 242

Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) .................................... 114

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) .......................... 113

Automatic headlamp mode ................ 96

Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 120

Automatic drive program ............... 122

Changing gear ............................... 120

Display message ............................ 194

Double-clutch function .................. 120

Drive program display .................... 119

Driving tips .................................... 120

Emergency running mode .............. 125

Engaging neutral ............................ 118

Engaging park position automati-

cally ............................................... 118

Engaging reverse gear ................... 118

Engaging the park position ............ 118

Gearshift recommendation ............ 123

Gliding mode ................................. 120

Important safety notes .................. 117

Kickdown ....................................... 120

Manual drive program .................... 122

Manual mode ................................. 123

Oil temperature (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 170

Overview ........................................ 117

Problem (malfunction) ................... 125

Pulling away ................................... 112

Rocking the vehicle free ................ 120

Shift override ................................. 124

Starting the engine ........................ 112

Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 121

Transmission position display ........ 119

Transmission positions .................. 119

Automatic transmission emer-

gency mode ....................................... 125

Index

Back button ....................................... 210

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59

Basic settings

see Settings

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 69

Important safety notes .................... 68

Replacing ......................................... 69

Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 255

Display message ............................ 188

Important safety notes .................. 254

Jump starting ................................. 256

Replacing ....................................... 256

Belt

see Seat belts

Belt warning ......................................... 44

Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 168

Display message ............................ 190

Notes/function .............................. 155

Blower

see Climate control

Bluetooth

Searching for a mobile phone ........ 216

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Brake Assist System

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake assistance

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 180

Notes ............................................. 291

Brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Brakes

ABS .................................................. 58

AMG high-performance and

ceramic brakes .............................. 133

BAS .................................................. 59

Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 291

Braking assistance appropriate to

the situation ..................................... 61

Display message ............................ 175

EBD .................................................. 64

Hill start assist ............................... 112

Important safety notes .................. 132

Maintenance .................................. 133

Parking brake ................................ 129

Riding tips ...................................... 132

Warning lamp ................................. 200

Braking assistance appropriate to

the situation

Function/notes ................................ 61

Breakdown assistance

Where will I find...? ........................ 249

see Flat tire

see Towing away

Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 160

Cabriolet

Soft top ............................................ 80

California

Important notice for retail cus-

tomers and lessees .......................... 25

Calling up a malfunction

see Display messages

Calling up the climate control bar

Multimedia system ........................ 213

Calling up the climate control

Multimedia system ........................ 213

Car

see Vehicle

Care

Car wash ........................................ 242

Carpets .......................................... 248

Display ........................................... 247

Exhaust pipe .................................. 247

Exterior lights ................................ 246

Gear or selector lever .................... 247

General notes ................................ 241

Interior ........................................... 247

Matte finish ................................... 244

Paint .............................................. 243

Plastic trim .................................... 247

Power washer ................................ 243

Rear view camera .......................... 246

Roof lining ...................................... 248

Index

Seat belt ........................................ 248

Seat cover ..................................... 248

Sensors ......................................... 246

Soft top .......................................... 245

Steering wheel ............................... 247

Trim pieces .................................... 247

Washing by hand ........................... 243

Wheels ........................................... 245

Windows ........................................ 245

Wiper blades .................................. 246

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 165

Center console

Overview .......................................... 36

Central control panel

Overview .......................................... 38

Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 66

Changing the media source ............. 165

Charge retention

Socket ........................................... 130

Charge-air pressure (on-board

computer) .......................................... 170

Child

Restraint system .............................. 56

Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 57

On the front-passenger seat ............ 57

Rearward-facing restraint system .... 57

Children

Special seat belt retractor ............... 56

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes .................... 55

Cigarette lighter ................................ 222

Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 246

Climate control

Air-recirculation mode ................... 107

Automatic climate control (dual-

zone) .............................................. 103

Controlling automatically ............... 105

Cooling with air dehumidification .. 104

Cooling with air dehumidification

(multimedia system) ...................... 213

Defrosting the windows ................. 106

Defrosting the windshield .............. 106

ECO start/stop function (3-zone

automatic climate control) ............. 104

General notes ................................ 103

Indicator lamp ................................ 105

Information about using auto-

matic climate control ..................... 104

Overview ........................................ 213

Overview of systems ...................... 103

Problem with the rear window

defroster ........................................ 107

Problems with cooling with air

dehumidification ............................ 105

Refrigerant ..................................... 293

Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 293

Setting the air distribution ............. 105

Setting the air vents ...................... 107

Setting the airflow ......................... 106

Setting the climate mode (multi-

media system) ............................... 213

Setting the temperature ................ 105

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ............................................ 107

Switching on/off ........................... 104

Switching the rear window

defroster on/off ............................ 106

Switching the synchronization

function on and off ........................ 106

Synchronization function (multi-

media system) ............................... 214

Climate control settings

Multimedia system ........................ 213

Climate control system

Climate control (3-zone automatic

climate control) ............................. 104

Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 33

Code for Apps

see QR code

COMAND display

Cleaning ......................................... 247

Combination switch ............................ 97

Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Consumption statistics (on-board

computer) .......................................... 162

Controller ........................................... 210

Convenience closing feature .............. 78

Index

Convenience opening

With the SmartKey ...........................78

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level .........................239

Display message ............................ 187

Filling capacity ............................... 292

Important safety notes .................. 292

Temperature display in the instru-

ment cluster .................................. 159

Warning lamp ................................. 204

Cooling

see Climate control

Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 186

Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 135

Deactivating ................................... 136

Display message ............................ 191

General notes ................................ 134

Setting a speed .............................. 136

Storing and maintaining current

speed ............................................. 135

Storing, maintaining and calling

up a speed ..................................... 135

Cup holder

Center console .............................. 220

Important safety notes .................. 220

Customer Assistance Center

(CAC) ..................................................... 28

Customer Relations Department ....... 28

Dashboard

see Cockpit

Dashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting

Data

see Technical data

Data carrier

Selecting ........................................ 165

Daytime running lamp mode

see Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 186

Function/notes ................................ 96

Switching on/off (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 169

Declarations of conformity ................. 27

Decorative film

Cleaning instructions ..................... 244

Diagnostics connection ...................... 27

Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 23

Introduction ..................................... 23

Digital speedometer ......................... 162

Display

see Display messages

see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 240

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 174

Driving systems ............................. 189

Engine ............................................ 187

General notes ................................ 173

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 174

Introduction ................................... 173

Lights ............................................. 186

Safety systems .............................. 175

SmartKey ....................................... 197

Tires ............................................... 192

Vehicle ........................................... 194

Distance recorder ............................. 161

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 206

Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 60

Door control panel

Overview .......................................... 39

Doors

Automatic locking (switch) ............... 73

Central locking/unlocking

(SmartKey) ....................................... 66

Display message ............................ 196

Emergency locking ........................... 73

Emergency unlocking ....................... 73

Important safety notes .................... 72

Opening (from inside) ...................... 72

Drinking and driving ......................... 131

Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 122

Display ........................................... 119

Manual ........................................... 122

Selecting ........................................ 116

Index

SETUP (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 171

Driver's door

see Doors

Driver's seat

see Seat

Driving

Important safety notes .................. 109

Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 241

Driving on flooded roads .................. 134

Driving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 59

Braking assistance appropriate to

the situation ..................................... 61

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 58

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59

Distance warning function ............... 60

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution) ............................................. 64

ESP

(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) ............................................... 62

Important safety information ........... 58

Overview .......................................... 58

Driving system

Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC .................................... 136

Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 148

Driving systems

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ........................................... 147

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 154

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 155

Cruise control ................................ 134

Display message ............................ 189

HOLD function ............................... 144

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 157

Lane Tracking package .................. 155

RACE START .................................. 146

Rear view camera .......................... 151

Driving tips

Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC .................................... 143

AMG high-performance and

ceramic brakes .............................. 133

Automatic transmission ................. 120

Brakes ........................................... 132

Break-in period .............................. 109

Downhill gradient ........................... 132

Drinking and driving ....................... 131

Driving in winter ............................. 134

Driving on flooded roads ................ 134

Driving on wet roads ...................... 134

Exhaust check ............................... 131

Fuel ................................................ 131

General .......................................... 131

Hydroplaning ................................. 134

Icy road surfaces ........................... 134

Important safety notes .................. 109

Limited braking efficiency on sal-

ted roads ....................................... 132

Snow chains .................................. 265

Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 132

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 109

Wet road surface ........................... 132

DVD video

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 166

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............ 116

E-SELECT lever ................................... 117

EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ................................ 90

EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ................................ 90

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution)

Display message ............................ 177

Function/notes ................................ 64

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine switch-off .......... 113

Deactivating/activating ................. 114

General information ....................... 113

Important safety notes .................. 113

Introduction ................................... 113

Electronic brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Electronic Stability Program

see ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

Index

Electronic Traction System

see ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Emergency

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent .................................................55

Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Emergency release

Driver's door .................................... 73

Trunk ...............................................76

Vehicle .............................................73

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Activation .........................................52

Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 25

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp ...........204

Display message ............................ 187

ECO start/stop function ................ 113

Engine number ............................... 288

Irregular running ............................ 115

Jump-starting ................................. 256

Starting problems .......................... 115

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey ....................................... 112

Starting with the Start/Stop but-

ton ................................................. 112

Switching off .................................. 128

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 261

Engine electronics

Notes ............................................. 287

Problem (malfunction) ................... 115

Engine oil

Adding ...........................................238

Additives ........................................ 291

Checking the oil level ..................... 236

Checking the oil level using the

dipstick .......................................... 236

Checking the oil level using the

on-board computer ........................ 237

Display message ............................ 188

Filling capacity ............................... 291

Notes about oil grades ................... 291

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 236

Temperature (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 170

Engine oil additives

see Additives (engine oil)

Entering an address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

see ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

ESP

(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 171

Characteristics ................................. 62

Deactivating/activating ................... 62

Deactivating/activating (button

in AMG vehicles) .............................. 63

Display message ............................ 175

Function/notes ................................ 62

General notes .................................. 62

Important safety information ........... 62

Warning lamp ................................. 201

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 62

Exhaust check ................................... 131

Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-

tions) ..................................................247

Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 246

see Lights

Exterior mirror

Calling up a stored setting (mem-

ory function) ....................................95

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting .........................................92

Dipping (automatic) .........................93

Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 92

Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 92

Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 93

Setting ............................................. 92

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ................................................. 94

Storing the parking position ............. 93

Favorites

Overview ........................................ 212

Features ............................................. 220

Filler cap

see Refueling

Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the

spare wheel ................................... 281

Index

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 250

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 251

Floormats ...........................................234

Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 287

Two-way radio ................................ 287

Front passenger seat

see Seat

Fuel

Additives ........................................ 290

Consumption statistics .................. 162

Displaying the current consump-

tion ................................................ 162

Displaying the range ......................162

Driving tips ....................................131

E10 ................................................ 290

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 290

Important safety notes .................. 289

Problem (malfunction) ................... 127

Refueling ........................................ 125

Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 289

Fuel filler flap

Closing ...........................................126

General information ....................... 126

Opening ......................................... 126

Problem (malfunction) ................... 127

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board

computer) ...................................... 162

Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 289

Problem (malfunction) ................... 127

Fuses

Allocation chart .............................262

Before changing .............................261

Fuse box in the front-passenger

footwell .......................................... 261

Fuse box in the rear compartment .. 262

Important safety notes .................. 261

G-Meter (on-board computer) .......... 171

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 234

General notes ................................ 231

Important safety notes .................. 231

Opening/closing the garage door .. 233

Problems when programming ........233

Programming (button in the rear-

view mirror) ................................... 231

Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 232

Gasoline ............................................. 290

Gear indicator (on-board com-

puter) ..................................................170

Genuine parts ...................................... 24

Glove box ...........................................219

Google™ Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Handling control system

see ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader function

on/off ............................................ 212

Touchpad ....................................... 211

Hazard warning lamps ........................ 98

Head bags

Operation ......................................... 47

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 89

Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 86

Headlamps

Cleaning system (notes) ................ 292

Fogging up ....................................... 99

see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating

see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................... 97

High-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 186

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Hill start assist .................................. 112

HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 145

Activation conditions ..................... 145

Deactivating ................................... 145

Display message ............................ 190

General notes ................................ 144

Home address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Index

Hood

Closing ........................................... 236

Display message ............................ 196

Important safety notes .................. 235

Opening .........................................235

Horn ...................................................... 33

Hydroplaning ..................................... 134

Ignition key

see SmartKey

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Immobilizer .......................................... 64

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators

see Turn signals

Inspection

see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 34

Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 169

Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 100

Overview .......................................... 99

Reading lamp ................................... 99

Setting the brightness of the dis-

play/switch (on-board computer) .. 169

iPod

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Jack

Using ............................................. 282

Jump starting (engine) ......................256

Key positions

SmartKey ....................................... 111

Start/Stop button .......................... 110

KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 78

Deactivation ..................................... 67

Locking ............................................ 67

Start function ................................... 67

Unlocking ......................................... 67

KEYLESS-GO start function

Start/Stop button .......................... 110

Kickdown

Driving tips ....................................120

Knee bag .............................................. 46

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 169

Display message ............................ 190

Function/information .................... 157

Lane Tracking package ..................... 155

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 172

License plate lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 186

Light sensor (display message) ....... 186

Lights

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 96

Fogged up headlamps ...................... 99

Hazard warning lamps ..................... 98

High beam flasher ............................ 97

High-beam headlamps ..................... 97

Light switch ..................................... 96

Low-beam headlamps ...................... 97

Parking lamps .................................. 97

Rear fog lamp .................................. 97

Setting exterior lighting ................... 96

Setting the brightness of the dis-

play/switch (on-board computer) .. 169

Standing lamps ................................ 97

Switching the daytime running

lamps on/off (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 169

Turn signals ..................................... 97

see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 218

Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 73

Emergency locking ........................... 73

Index

From inside (central locking but-

ton) .................................................. 72

see KEYLESS-GO

Locking centrally

see Central locking

Locking the vehicle

Trunk lid separately ......................... 76

Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 186

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Lubricant additives

see Additives (engine oil)

M button ............................................. 121

M+S tires ............................................ 265

Malfunction message

see Display messages

Manual drive program

Activating ....................................... 122

Changing gear ............................... 123

Deactivating ................................... 123

General notes ................................ 122

Manual mode

Activating ....................................... 123

Deactivating ................................... 124

General notes ................................ 123

Matte finish (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 244

mbrace

Call priority .................................... 226

Display message ............................ 180

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 226

Downloading routes ....................... 229

Emergency call .............................. 223

General notes ................................ 222

Geo fencing ................................... 229

Info call button .............................. 225

Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 228

Remote fault diagnosis .................. 228

Remote vehicle locking .................. 227

Roadside assistance button ........... 224

Search & Send ............................... 226

Self-test ......................................... 223

Speed alert .................................... 229

System .......................................... 223

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 229

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 227

Mechanical key

Function/notes ................................ 68

General notes .................................. 68

Inserting .......................................... 68

Locking vehicle ................................ 73

Removing ......................................... 68

Unlocking the driver's door .............. 73

Media Interface

see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 165

Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exterior

mirrors ............................................. 94

Mercedes me connect

Change of vehicle ............................ 32

Data protection ................................ 32

Display message ............................ 180

Website ............................................ 31

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC .................................... 136

Message memory (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 174

Messages

see Display messages

see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 246

Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors

see Rear-view mirror

see Vanity mirror

Mobile phone

Connecting (device manager) ........ 215

Frequencies ................................... 287

Installation ..................................... 287

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 166

Transmission output (maximum) .... 287

Model type

see Vehicle identification plate

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) ........................................... 68

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 285

Mounting a new wheel ................... 284

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 282

Index

Raising the vehicle .........................282

Removing a wheel .......................... 284

Securing the vehicle against roll-

ing away ........................................ 282

MP3

Operation ....................................... 165

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Multifunction display

Function/notes .............................161

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer .. 160

Overview .......................................... 35

Multimedia system

Switching on and off ......................210

Music files

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Navigation

Displaying (on-board computer) ..... 163

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 163

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Neck-level heating/head-level

heating

see AIRSCARF

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-

cle ....................................................... 109

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 48

Faults ............................................... 51

Operation ......................................... 48

System self-test ............................... 50

Occupant safety

Air bags ...........................................45

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent ................................................. 55

Belt warning .....................................44

Children in the vehicle .....................55

Important safety notes .................... 40

Introduction to the restraint sys-

tem .................................................. 40

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 48

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ............................................... 41

Pets in the vehicle ........................... 58

PRE-SAFE

(anticipatory occu-

pant protection) ............................... 54

Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41

Seat belt .......................................... 41

Odometer ........................................... 161

Oil

see Engine oil

On-board computer

Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC .................................... 142

AMG menu .....................................170

Assistance graphic menu ...............167

Assistance menu ........................... 168

Display messages .......................... 173

Displaying a service message ........241

Factory settings .............................170

G-Meter ......................................... 171

Important safety notes .................. 159

Instrument cluster menu ............... 169

Lights menu ................................... 169

Media menu ................................... 165

Menu overview .............................. 161

Message memory .......................... 174

Navigation menu ............................ 163

Operation ....................................... 160

RACETIMER ................................... 172

Radio menu ................................... 164

Service menu ................................. 168

Settings menu ............................... 168

Standard display ............................ 161

Telephone menu ............................ 166

Trip menu ...................................... 161

Video DVD operation ..................... 166

On-board diagnostic interface

see Diagnostics connection

Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 27

Important safety notes .................... 26

Operating system

see On-board computer

Operation

Digital Operator's Manual ................ 23

Index

Operator's Manual

Overview .......................................... 25

Vehicle equipment ........................... 25

Outside temperature display ........... 159

Overhead control panel ......................37

Paddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shifters

Paint code number ............................287

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 243

Panic alarm .......................................... 40

Parking

Engaging park position .................. 118

Important safety notes .................. 127

Parking brake ................................ 129

Position of exterior mirror, front-

passenger side ................................. 93

Rear view camera .......................... 151

Switching off the engine ................ 128

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

see Exterior mirrors

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 150

Driving system ............................... 148

Important safety notes .................. 148

Problems (malfunctions) ................ 150

Sensor range ................................. 148

Warning display ............................. 149

Parking assistance

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking brake

Applying automatically ................... 129

Applying or releasing manually ...... 129

Display message ............................ 177

Electric parking brake .................... 129

Emergency braking ........................ 130

General notes ................................ 129

Releasing automatically ................. 130

Warning lamp ................................. 203

Parking lamps

Switching on/off .............................. 97

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Display message ............................ 184

Indicator lamps ................................ 41

Problems (malfunction) .................. 184

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 58

Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 247

Power washers .................................. 243

Power windows

see Side windows

Pre-emptive safety

see PRE-SAFE

(anticipatory

occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE

(anticipatory occupant

protection)

Display message ............................ 181

Operation ......................................... 54

Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 64

Immobilizer ...................................... 64

Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 24

Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 112

General notes ................................ 112

Hill start assist ............................... 112

QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1

Rescue card ..................................... 29

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28

Quick access for audio and tele-

phone

Changing the station/music

track .............................................. 212

RACE START

Activating ....................................... 146

Activation conditions ..................... 146

Important safety notes .................. 146

RACE TIMER (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 172

Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 164

Index

Radio mode

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Radio-wave reception/transmis-

sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 27

Reading lamp ....................................... 99

Rear axle steering

Function/notes .............................113

Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 186

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Rear lamps

see Lights

Rear spoiler

Display message ............................ 196

Extending/retracting ..................... 229

Problem ......................................... 230

Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 246

Function/notes .............................151

Switching on/off ........................... 151

Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 107

Switching on/off ........................... 107

Rear-view mirror

Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 91

Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93

Recycling

see Protection of the environment

Reflective safety jacket .................... 249

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem)

Important safety notes .................. 293

Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34

Important safety notes .................. 125

Refueling process .......................... 126

see Fuel

Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 231

Replacing bulbs

General notes ................................ 100

Reporting safety defects .................... 28

Rescue card ......................................... 29

Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 189

Warning lamp ................................. 204

Restraint system

Display message ............................ 182

Introduction ..................................... 40

Warning lamp ................................. 203

Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 77

Reversing lamps (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 186

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26

Roll away protection

see HOLD function

Roof

see Soft top

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 248

Route guidance

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 55

see Occupant safety

see Operating safety

Safety system

see Driving safety systems

SD card

Inserting/removing ........................ 217

SD memory card

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Selecting ........................................ 165

Search & Send

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Seat

Correct driver's seat position ........... 84

Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and front-

passenger seat belt ......................... 44

Cleaning ......................................... 248

Correct usage .................................. 43

Fastening ......................................... 44

Index

Important safety guidelines .............42

Introduction .....................................41

Releasing ......................................... 44

Warning lamp ................................. 199

Warning lamp (function) ................... 44

Seat function

see Seat

Seats

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 86

Adjusting (manually) ........................ 85

Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 87

Adjusting lumbar support ................ 86

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86

Calling up a stored setting (mem-

ory function) .................................... 95

Cleaning the cover ......................... 248

Important safety notes .................... 84

Seat heating problem ...................... 89

Seat ventilation problem .................. 89

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ................................................. 94

Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 89

Switching seat heating on/off ......... 87

Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 88

Selecting a gear

see Automatic transmission

Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 247

Positions ........................................ 117

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 246

Service menu (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 168

Service message

see ASSYST PLUS

Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 291

Coolant (engine) ............................ 292

Engine oil ....................................... 291

Fuel ................................................ 289

Important safety notes .................. 289

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem) ............................................... 293

Washer fluid ................................... 292

Setting the date/time format

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Setting the language

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Setting the time

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 170

On-board computer ....................... 168

SETUP (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 171

Side impact air bag ............................. 47

Side marker lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 186

Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 245

Convenience closing feature ............ 78

Convenience opening feature .......... 78

Important safety information ........... 76

Opening/closing .............................. 77

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79

Resetting ......................................... 78

Reversing feature ............................. 77

SIRIUS services

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

SmartKey

Changing the battery ....................... 69

Changing the programming ............. 68

Checking the battery ....................... 69

Convenience closing feature ............ 78

Convenience opening feature .......... 78

Display message ............................ 197

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 66

Important safety notes .................... 66

KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 67

Loss ................................................. 70

Mechanical key ................................ 68

Opening/closing soft top ................. 81

Overview .......................................... 66

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 111

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70

Starting the engine ........................ 112

SMS

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Snow chains ...................................... 265

Index

Sockets

General notes ................................ 222

Trunk ............................................. 222

Soft top

Cleaning ......................................... 245

Important safety notes .................... 80

Opening/closing (SmartKey) ........... 81

Opening/closing (with soft-top

switch) ............................................. 80

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 83

Relocking ......................................... 81

Wind screen .....................................82

Soft-top switch .................................... 80

Sound

Switching on/off ........................... 210

Special seat belt retractor .................. 56

Specialist workshop ............................28

Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-

tional speedometer ........................ 170

Digital ............................................ 162

Segments ...................................... 159

Selecting the display unit ............... 169

SPORT handling mode

Activating/deactivating ...................62

Warning lamp ................................. 203

Sports exhaust system

see AMG sports exhaust system

Standing lamps

Display message ............................186

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Start/Stop button

General notes ................................ 110

Key positions ................................. 110

Starting the engine ........................ 112

Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 111

Steering

Display message ............................ 197

Warning lamps ............................... 208

Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 90

Button overview ............................... 35

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 160

Calling up a stored setting (mem-

ory function) ....................................95

Cleaning .........................................247

EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ...............90

Important safety notes .................... 90

Paddle shifters ............................... 121

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) .................................................94

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 121

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...................172

Stowage areas ................................... 218

Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 219

Armrest (under) .............................219

Cup holders ................................... 220

Glove box ....................................... 219

Important safety information ......... 218

Stowage net ................................... 219

see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 219

Summer opening

see Side windows

Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 265

Sun visor ............................................ 220

Suspension setting

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ...........................................147

Suspension tuning

SETUP (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............171

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ................................................. 107

Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 217

Tachometer ........................................ 159

Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 186

see Lights

Tank

see Fuel tank

Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34

Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 289

Index

Information .................................... 287

Tires/wheels .................................285

Vehicle data ................................... 293

Telephone

Accepting a call (multifunction

steering wheel) .............................. 167

Authorizing a mobile phone (con-

necting) ......................................... 216

Connecting a mobile phone

(device manager) ........................... 215

Display message ............................ 197

Introduction ................................... 166

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 166

Number from the phone book ........167

Redialing ........................................ 167

Rejecting/ending a call ................. 167

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................209

Temperature

Coolant (display in the instrument

cluster) .......................................... 159

Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 170

Outside temperature ......................159

Setting (climate control) ................ 105

Transmission oil (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 170

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 172

Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 269

Checking manually ........................ 268

Display message ............................ 192

Maximum ....................................... 268

Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 253

Notes ............................................. 267

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 253

Recommended ............................... 266

Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure elec-

tronically ........................................ 270

Function/notes .............................269

General notes ................................ 269

Important safety notes .................. 269

Restarting ...................................... 271

Warning lamp ................................. 207

Warning message .......................... 270

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 250

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes .................. 251

Storage location ............................ 250

Tire pressure not reached .............. 253

Tire pressure reached .................... 253

Using ............................................. 251

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 280

Average weight of the vehicle

occupants (definition) .................... 279

Bar (definition) ............................... 279

Changing a wheel .......................... 281

Characteristics .............................. 279

Checking ........................................ 264

Curb weight (definition) ................. 280

Definition of terms ......................... 279

Direction of rotation ......................281

Display message ............................ 192

Distribution of the vehicle occu-

pants (definition) ............................ 281

DOT (Department of Transporta-

tion) (definition) .............................279

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................... 278

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(definition) ..................................... 279

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-

inition) ...........................................280

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) (definition) .............................. 280

Important safety notes .................. 263

Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment (definition) ...... 279

Information on driving .................... 263

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 280

Labeling (overview) ........................ 276

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 281

Load index ..................................... 278

Load index (definition) ................... 280

Maximum load on a tire (defini-

tion) ............................................... 280

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(definition) ..................................... 280

Maximum permissible tire pres-

sure (definition) ............................. 280

Maximum tire load ......................... 278

Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 280

Notes on sport tires ....................... 263

Optional equipment weight (defi-

nition) ............................................ 281

Index

PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-

inition) ...........................................280

Replacing ....................................... 281

Service life ..................................... 264

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 280

Speed rating (definition) ................ 280

Storing ...........................................282

Structure and characteristics

(definition) ..................................... 279

Summer tires in winter .................. 265

Temperature .................................. 275

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

(definition) ..................................... 281

Tire bead (definition) ......................280

Tire pressure (definition) ................ 280

Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 279

Tire size (data) ............................... 285

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity, speed rating .................... 276

Tire tread ....................................... 264

Tire tread (definition) ..................... 280

Total load limit (definition) ............. 281

Traction ......................................... 275

Traction (definition) ....................... 281

Tread wear ..................................... 275

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards ...................................... 274

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards (definition) .................... 279

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 281

Wheel and tire combination ........... 285

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 279

see Flat tire

Tool

see Vehicle tool kit

Touchpad

Changing the station/music

track .............................................. 212

Character suggestions ................... 211

Deleting characters ....................... 211

Entering a space ............................ 211

Entering characters ....................... 211

Gesture control .............................. 211

Handwriting recognition ................ 211

Operating the touchpad ................. 211

Overview ........................................ 211

Quick access for Audio .................. 212

Switching ....................................... 211

Switching input line ....................... 211

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 261

Towing

Permitted towing methods ............ 259

Towing away

Important safety guidelines ........... 258

Installing the towing eye ................ 259

Removing the towing eye ............... 260

Transporting the vehicle ................ 260

With both axles on the ground ....... 260

Towing eye ......................................... 249

Traction system

see ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Transmission

Driving tips .................................... 120

Selector lever ................................ 117

see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 119

Transmission positions

General notes ................................ 117

Overview ........................................ 118

Transporting the vehicle .................. 260

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 247

Trip computer (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 162

Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 161

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 162

Trunk lid

Display message ............................ 196

Important safety notes .................... 74

Locking separately ........................... 76

Opening (automatically from

inside) .............................................. 75

Opening dimensions ...................... 293

Opening/closing (from the out-

side) ................................................. 74

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO ............ 74

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 293

Turn signals

Display message ............................ 186

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Index

Two-way radio

Frequencies ................................... 287

Installation ..................................... 287

Transmission output (maximum) .... 287

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 73

From inside the vehicle (central

unlocking button) ............................. 72

USB devices

Connecting to the Media Inter-

face ...............................................217

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........221

Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 28

Data acquisition ............................... 29

Display message ............................ 194

Electronics ..................................... 287

Equipment ....................................... 25

Individual settings .......................... 168

Limited Warranty .............................29

Loading .......................................... 271

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 73

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 66

Lowering ........................................ 285

Maintenance .................................... 26

Operating safety .............................. 26

Parking .......................................... 127

Parking for a long period ................ 130

Pulling away ................................... 112

Raising ........................................... 282

Reporting problems ......................... 28

Securing from rolling away ............ 282

Towing away .................................. 258

Transporting .................................. 260

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 73

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 66

Vehicle data ................................... 293

Vehicle battery

see Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data

Trunk load (maximum) ................... 293

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 293

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 73

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 287

Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 249

Ventilation

see Climate control

Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 166

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

VIN

Seat ............................................... 288

Type plate ...................................... 287

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 201

Active Brake Assist ........................ 206

Brakes ........................................... 200

Check Engine ................................. 204

Coolant .......................................... 204

Distance warning ........................... 206

ESP

.............................................. 201

ESP

OFF ....................................... 202

Fuel tank ........................................ 204

Overview .......................................... 34

Parking brake ................................ 203

PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 41

Reserve fuel ................................... 204

Restraint system ............................ 203

Seat belt ........................................ 199

SPORT handling mode ................... 203

Steering ......................................... 208

Tire pressure monitor .................... 207

Warranty .............................................. 25

Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 197

Weather display (COMAND)

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 209

Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 285

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 285

Index

Wheel chock ...................................... 282

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 281

Checking ........................................ 264

Cleaning ......................................... 245

Important safety notes .................. 263

Information on driving .................... 263

Interchanging/changing ................ 281

Mounting a new wheel ...................284

Mounting a wheel .......................... 282

Notes on sport tires ....................... 263

Removing a wheel .......................... 284

Storing ...........................................282

Tightening torque ........................... 285

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 285

Wind screen ......................................... 82

Window curtain air bag

Display message ............................ 183

Windows

see Side windows

Windshield

Defrosting ...................................... 106

Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 240

Important safety notes .................. 292

Windshield wipers

Problem (malfunction) ................... 102

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 101

Switching on/off ........................... 100

Winter driving

Slippery road surfaces ................... 134

Snow chains .................................. 265

Winter operation

General notes ................................ 265

Summer tires ................................. 265

Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 265

Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 246

Important safety notes .................. 101

Replacing ....................................... 101

Replacing (windshield) ................... 101

Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-

mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.

The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-

hensive and specifically adapted information on

your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-

tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-

ual via the multimedia system.

You will not incur any costs when calling up

the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital

Operator's Manual works without connecting

to the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of the

Digital Operator's Manual:

Visual search

The visual search allows you to explore your

vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the

vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can

access many of the different topics covered

by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access

the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-

cle interior" view.

Keyword search

The keyword search allows you to search for a

keyword by entering characters. Further

information can be found in the Digital Oper-

ator's Manual in the "COMAND" section

under the "Character entry (telephony)" key-

word.

Contents

You can select individual sections in the con-

tents.

The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-

ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-

ual

Show the main function bar by sliding 5 the

controller up.

Select the VehicleVehicle menu item by turning

3 and pressing 7 the controller.

The vehicle menu is displayed.

Select the Operator'sOperator's ManualManual menu item by

turning 3 and pressing 7 the controller.

Confirm 7 the message about the warning

and safety notes.

The menu for the Digital Operator's Manual

appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual

General notes

Please observe the information about the oper-

ation of the controller (Y page 210).

Content pages

The content pages can be accessed by means of

a visual search, a keyword search or using the

contents.

To scroll forward/back: turn 3 the con-

troller.

To select information text or save book-

marks: slide 9 the controller to the

right ;.

To select a link: slide 6 the controller

down =.

To exit a content page: select the %

symbol ?.

To call up the menu of the Digital Opera-

tor's Manual: select Þ symbol A.

To switch functions to the multimedia

system: select % symbol ? repeatedly

until you exit the Digital Operator's Manual.

Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

General notes

Environmental note

The pollutant emission of your vehicle is

directly related to the vehicle's operation.

You can make a contribution to environmental

protection by operating your vehicle in an

environmentally responsible manner. To do

this, observe the following recommendations

on operating conditions and your personal

driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tire pressure is correct.

Do not carry any unnecessary weight with

you (e.g. a roof rack which is no longer

required).

Observe the service intervals. A regularly

serviced vehicle will contribute to environ-

mental protection.

Always have maintenance work carried out

at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.

Do not warm up the engine while station-

ary.

Drive carefully and maintain a sufficient dis-

tance to other vehicles.

Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking.

Shift gears in good time and use each gear

only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.

Switch off the engine in stationary traffic,

e.g. use the ECO start/stop function.

Drive in a fuel-saving manner. Pay attention

to the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving

style.

Environmental concerns and recom-

mendations

Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to

dispose of materials, first try to recycle or re-use

them. Observe the relevant environmental rules

and regulations when disposing of materials. In

this way you will help to protect the environ-

ment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Environmental note

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major

assemblies and parts which are of the same

quality as new parts. They are covered by the

same Limited Warranty entitlements as new

parts.

Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-

ces, as well as control units and sensors for

these restraint systems, may be installed in

the following areas of your vehicle:

doors

door pillars

door sills

seats

cockpit

instrument cluster

center console

Do not install accessories such as audio sys-

tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs

or welding. You could impair the operating

efficiency of the restraint systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of

your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as

well as accessories relevant to safety which

have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This

could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-

ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-

ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that

have been specifically approved for your vehi-

cle.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to

strict quality control. Every part has been spe-

cifically developed, manufactured or selected

for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

should be used.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Introduction

More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for

Mercedes-Benz models.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain

a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for

necessary service and repair work. In addition,

strategically located parts delivery centers pro-

vide quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz

parts (Y page 287).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment

This Operator's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment of

your vehicle available at the time of this Oper-

ator's Manual going to print. Country-specific

differences are possible. Bear in mind that

your vehicle may not feature all functions

described here. This also applies to safety-

relevant systems and functions. The equip-

ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from

that shown in the descriptions and illustra-

tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-

tems installed in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning

equipment and operation, please consult an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-

let are important documents and should be kept

in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty

The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

accordance with the warranty terms and condi-

tions in the Service and Warranty Information

booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

replace and repair all factory-installed parts in

accordance with the following warranty terms

and conditions:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-

setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island

and Vermont Emission Control System War-

ranty

State warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered

by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories

warranties. These are available at any author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Should you lose your Service and Warranty

Information booklet, have an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-

ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-

mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-

nia

Under California law you may be entitled to a

replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the

purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-

able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service

facilities fail to fix one or more substantial

defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are

covered by its express warranty.

During the period of 18 months from original

delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the

odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,

a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-

sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more

of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to cause

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is

driven, that defect or malfunction has been

subject to repair two or more times, and you

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,

LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction

of a less serious nature than category (1)

has been subject to repair four or more

times and you have directly notified

Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its

repair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of

repair of the same or different substantial

defects or malfunctions for a cumulative

total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:

Service and vehicle operation

Introduction

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance

USA only:

Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet

with you when you bring the vehicle to an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service

advisor will record every service for you in the

Service and Warranty Booklet.

Canada only:

Have every service in a qualified specialist work-

shop confirmed in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-

gram offers technical help in the event of a

breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-

tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24

hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

(USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

For additional information, refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program

brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"

section in the Service and Warranty Booklet

(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-

ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-

ership

In the event of a change of address, please send

us the "Notification of Address Change" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service Center (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-

ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-

ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the

next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please send us

the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA

and Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

the following points:

Service facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.

Lead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuel

can cause damage to the catalytic converter.

The fuel may have a considerably lower

octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause

engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for

delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-

ery Program. For details, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the

following addresses.

In the USA

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/

maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions or

system failures. There is a risk of an accident.

Operating safety

Introduction

Always have the prescribed service/mainte-

nance work as well as any required repairs

carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk

of fire.

When driving on an unpaved road or off-road,

check the vehicle underside regularly. In par-

ticular, remove trapped plant parts or other

flammable material. Contact a qualified spe-

cialist workshop immediately if damage is

detected.

WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their

software as well as wiring can impair their

function and/or the function of other net-

worked components. In particular, systems

relevant to safety could also be affected. As a

result, these may no longer function as inten-

ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of

the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an

accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-

tronic components or their software. You

should have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

curb or an unpaved road

you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road

a heavy object strikes the underbody or

parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-

body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be

damaged without the damage being visible.

Components damaged in this way can unex-

pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no

longer withstand the loads they are designed

to.

If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-

bustible materials such as leaves, grass or

twigs can gather between the underbody and

the underbody paneling. If these materials

come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust

system, they can catch fire.

In such situations, have the vehicle checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-

ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,

pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,

paying attention to road and traffic condi-

tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive

and/or transmit radio waves

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-

ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: 1) These

devices may not cause harmful interference,

and 2) These devices must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation. Changes or modifi-

cations not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle

comply with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may

not cause interference, and (2) These devices

must accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation of

the device."

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is only intended for

the connection of diagnostic equipment at a

qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you connect equipment to a diagnostics

connection in the vehicle, it may affect the

operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the

operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-

ted. There is a risk of an accident.

Operating safety

Introduction

Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-

nection in the vehicle, which is approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is

jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.

If the engine is switched off and equipment

on the diagnostics connection is used, the

starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-

nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-

mation being reset, for example. This may lead

to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of

the next emissions test during the main inspec-

tion.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-

fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary

specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to

correctly carry out the work required on your

vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-

evant to safety.

Always have the following work carried out at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:

work relevant to safety

service and maintenance work

repair work

alterations, installation work and modifica-

tions

work on electronic components

Correct use

If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-

ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.

Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information when driving

your vehicle:

the safety notes in this manual

the vehicle technical data

traffic rules and regulations

laws and safety standards pertaining to motor

vehicles

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your

vehicle, particularly one that you believe may

affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-

ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-

fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-

isfaction, please discuss the problem again with

the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-

essary, contact us at one of the following

addresses.

In the USA

Customer Assistance Center

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Customer Relations Department

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only:

The following text is published as required of

manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-

eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the

"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of

1966".

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury

or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

Operating safety

Introduction

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety at:

http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty

Observe the notes in this Operator's Manual

regarding the correct operation of your vehi-

cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam-

age to the vehicle which is caused by violation

of these notes is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new

or used-vehicle warranty.

QR code for rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap

and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the

event of an accident, rescue services can use

the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-

cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue

card contains the most important information

about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the

routing of the electric cables.

You can find more information at

www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Electronic control units

There are electronic control units installed in

your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for

your vehicle to operate safely, while some offer

support during driving (driver assistance sys-

tems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort

and entertainment functions that are also made

possible by electronic control units.

Electronic control units contain data storage

systems that can temporarily or permanently

save technical information concerning the vehi-

cle's condition, component stress and mainte-

nance requirements as well as technical events

and malfunctions.

This information generally documents the con-

dition of a component, a module, a system or the

surroundings, such as:

Operating states of system components (e.g.

fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)

Status messages concerning the vehicle or its

individual components (e.g. wheel rpm/

speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, indi-

cation of whether seat belts are fastened)

Malfunctions and defects in important system

components (e.g. lights, brakes)

Information about events leading to vehicle

damage

System responses in special driving situa-

tions (e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of

stability control systems)

Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain

sensor)

In addition to performing the actual control unit

function, this data is used by manufacturers to

detect and rectify malfunctions and to optimize

vehicle functions. Most of this data is volatile

and processed only in the vehicle itself. Only a

small part of the data is stored in event or mal-

function memories.

When you use services, the technical data from

the vehicle can be read out by service network

employees (e.g. workshops, manufacturers) or

third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Services

can include repair services, maintenance pro-

cesses, warranty cases and quality assurance

measures. The data are read out via the con-

nection for the diagnostics connection in the

vehicle, which is required by law. The relevant

offices in the service network or third parties

collect, process and use the data. This data

documents the vehicle's technical states, is

used to help in finding malfunctions and improv-

ing quality and is sent to the manufacturer

where necessary. In addition, the manufacturer

is subject to product liability. The manufacturer

needs technical data from vehicles for this pur-

pose.

Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be

reset by a service center during repair or service

work.

Data stored in the vehicle

Introduction

You can incorporate data into the vehicle's com-

fort and infotainment functions yourself as part

of the selected equipment.

These include, for example:

Multimedia data such as music, films or pho-

tos for playback in an integrated multimedia

system

Address book data for use in conjunction with

an integrated hands-free system or an inte-

grated navigation system

Navigation destinations that have been

entered

Data about using Internet services

This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or

located on a device that you have connected to

the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB memory stick

or MP3 player). If this data is saved in the vehi-

cle, you can delete it at any time. This data is

sent to third parties only at your request, par-

ticularly when you use online services in accord-

ance with the settings that you have selected.

You can save and change comfort settings/

customizations in the vehicle at any time.

Depending on the equipment in question, these

can include:

Seat and steering wheel position settings

Suspension and climate control settings

Custom settings such as interior lighting

If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you

can connect your smartphone or another mobile

end device to the vehicle. You can control this by

means of the control elements integrated in the

vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound

can be output via the multimedia system. Spe-

cific items of information are also sent to your

smartphone.

Depending on the type of integration, this can

include:

General vehicle information

Position data

This allows the use of selected smartphone

apps, such as navigation or music player apps.

There is no additional interaction between the

smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active

access to vehicle data. The type of additional

data processing is determined by the provider of

the app being used. Whether you can configure

settings for it and, if so, which ones, depends on

the app and your smartphone's operating sys-

tem.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connec-

tion, data can be exchanged between your vehi-

cle and other systems. The wireless network

connection is made possible by the vehicle's

own transmitter and receiver or by mobile devi-

ces that you have brought into the vehicle (e.g.

smartphones). Online functions can be used via

this wireless network connection. These include

online services and applications/apps provided

by the manufacturer or other providers.

Services provided by the manufacturer

In the case of the manufacturer's online serv-

ices, the manufacturer describes the functions

in a suitable place (e.g. operating instructions,

manufacturer's website) and provides the asso-

ciated information subject to data protection

legislation. Personal data can be used in order to

provide online services. The exchange of data

for this purpose takes place via a secure con-

nection, e.g. with the manufacturer's IT systems

intended for the purpose. Collecting, processing

and using personal data beyond the provision of

services is permitted only on the basis of a stat-

utory permit or declaration of consent.

You can usually activate and deactivate the serv-

ices and functions (sometimes subject to a fee).

In many cases, this also applies to the vehicle's

entire data connection. However, this does not

apply in particular to legally prescribed func-

tions and services such as the "eCall" emer-

gency call system.

Services from third parties

If it is possible to use online services from other

providers, these services are the responsibility

of the provider in question and subject to that

provider's data protection conditions and terms

of use. The manufacturer has no influence over

the content exchanged here.

For this reason, please ask the service provider

for information about the type, extent and pur-

pose of the collection and use of personal data

when services are provided by third parties.

Data stored in the vehicle

Introduction

COMAND/mbrace

If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or

mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's

operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-

uations, and the location of the vehicle may be

compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-

tem.

For additional information please refer to the

COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-

tions.

Event data recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-

ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were

operating

Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recor-

ded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash

situation occurs; no data are recorded by the

EDR under normal driving conditions and no

personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash

location) are recorded. However, other parties,

such as law enforcement could combine the

EDR data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash investi-

gation.

Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed

to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and

special equipment is required. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have

the special equipment, such as law enforce-

ment, can read the information by accessing the

vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-

ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-

dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash

Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract

data from the EDR is commercially available,

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly

disclaims any and all liability arising from the

extraction of this information by unauthorized

Mercedes-Benz personnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others

without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if

the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the

lessee. Exceptions to this representation

include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-

ment; by federal, state or local government; in

connection with or arising out of litigation involv-

ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,

as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the

Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-

ing, modifying or removing the EDR component

may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-

tem Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

This means that in the event of such conflict, the

federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,

13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Mercedes me website

General information

WARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Mercedes me connect services may be limited

to certain countries and certain devices.

Mercedes me website

Introduction

Daimler AG can restrict or discontinue the ser-

vice.

The remote online services of Mercedes me

connect:

are not intended for use in the vehicle. These

services must not be used while the vehicle is

in motion.

may contain data which is out of date or inva-

lid. The displays in the vehicle apply at all

times.

The remote online services and selected basic

services can be used via the website https://

www.mercedes.me or via the web application

for your smartphone. They can be called up

using many Internet-enabled end devices.

You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when

calling up the website via the multimedia sys-

tem. Do not use the website while the vehicle is

in motion.

Notes on data protection

WARNING

The use of remote control functions can lead

to security risks.

Remote control functions include, for exam-

ple:

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

Activating auxiliary heating

A security risk could occur, for example by

the activation of the auxiliary heating at an

unsuitable location for the vehicle.

An unauthorized person with knowledge of

your access data could take control of vehicle

behavior and/or individual vehicle functions.

Take great care to protect your access data

from unauthorized access.

Change your access data immediately if you

suspect unauthorized access has taken place

or that your access data has been compro-

mised. In addition, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.

Any person who has access to your access data

can use the Mercedes me connect services.

Change of vehicle

If you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to delete

the vehicle from your personal area on the

Mercedes me website.

If you have bought a used vehicle, it is possible

that the previous owner still has access to the

Mercedes me connect services. Daimler AG or

Mercedes me connect are not automatically

informed about the change of owner.

For as long as the previous owner has a con-

nection with the vehicle, they can use all of the

Mercedes me connect services.

For example:

locating the vehicle

remotely operated vehicle functions

e.g. locking and unlocking the vehicle

Active vehicle location is shown in the multime-

dia system display.

If in doubt, deactivate the function:

on the Mercedes me connect website by

switching off the function in the settings.

via the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You

can call up the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Center by pressing the ï button in the

overhead control unit. Have access for the

previous owner deactivated.

Information on copyright

Free and open-source software

Information on license for free and open-source

software used in your vehicle can be found on

the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet

and, including updates, on the following web-

site:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/

opensource

Information on copyright

Introduction

Cockpit

Function Page

Combination switch 97

;

Steering wheel paddle shift-

ers 121

Instrument cluster 34

Overhead control panel 37

Central control panel 38

Climate control systems 104

Horn

Adjusts the steering wheel

electrically 90

Function Page

Cruise control lever 134

Unlocks the trunk lid 75

Electric parking brake 129

Diagnostics connection 27

Opens the hood 235

Rear fog lamp 97

Light switch 96

Cockpit

At a glance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

Speedometer

Speedometer segments 159

Warning and indicator lamps:

h Tire pressure monitor

207

å ESP

OFF

201

÷ ESP

201

· Distance warning

206

Ð Power steering

208

6 Restraint system

ü Seat belts

199

K High-beam headlamps

L Low-beam headlamps

T Parking lamps

N This indicator lamp has

no function

R Rear fog lamp

;

#! Turn signals

Multifunction display 161

Tachometer 159

Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps:

! Electric parking brake

(yellow)

203

! ABS

201

; Check Engine

204

Electric parking brake (red) 203

F USA only

! Canada only

Brakes (red) 200

$ USA only

J Canada only

M SPORT handling mode

203

Coolant temperature gauge 159

Warning and indicator lamps:

? Coolant

204

Fuel level indicator

Warning and indicator lamps:

8 Reserve fuel level with

fuel filler flap location indica-

tor (right) 204

Information on the display of the outside

temperature in the multifunction display can

be found under "Outside temperature dis-

play" (Y page 159).

Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting

using the on-board computer (Y page 169).

Instrument cluster

At a glance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

Multifunction display 161

;

Multimedia system display

~ Rejects or ends a call

6 Makes or accepts a call

Further telephone functions 166

WXAdjusts volume

8 Mute

ó Switches on the Voice

Control System

Function Page

ò Opens the menu list

9:Selects a menu

a Confirms the selection

% Back

Operating the on-board com-

puter 160

ñ Switches off the Voice

Control System

i In vehicles with multimedia system

COMAND you can find further information:

on the multimedia system in the Digital

Operator's Manual

on the Voice Control System in the sepa-

rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

Center console

Function Page

Stowage compartment 219

12 V socket 222

Cigarette lighter 222

Ashtray 221

;

Ü Switches the multime-

dia system on/off (see the

Digital Owner's Manual)

p M button (activates man-

ual mode) 121

è ECO start/stop func-

tion 114

Adjusts the exhaust flap of

the AMG sports exhaust sys-

tem 114

Ignition lock (in the stowage

compartment) 111

Stowage compartment 219

AMG E-SELECT selector lever 117

Function Page

à Adjusts AMG RIDE

CONTROL sports suspension

147

j Park position with parking

lock 117

å Activates/deactivates

ESP

M Activates/deactivates

SPORT handling mode 62

Touchpad; see Digital Opera-

tor's Manual

Start/Stop button 110

Multimedia system control-

ler; see Digital Operator's

Manual

Selects the drive program

(DYNAMIC SELECT control-

ler) 116

Center console

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

| Switches the automatic

interior lighting control

on/off

100

;

p Switches the right-

hand reading lamp on/off 99

ï Info call button

(mbrace system) 225

Inside rearview mirror 93

Transmitter buttons for the

garage door opener 231

Function Page

G SOS button

(mbrace system)

223

Opens the soft top 80

F Breakdown assistance

call button (mbrace system) 224

p Switches the left-hand

reading lamp on/off 99

c Switches the interior

lighting on/off

Overhead control panel

At a glance

Central control panel

Function Page

c Seat heating

;

s Seat ventilation

Ò AIRSCARF

¬ Extends/retracts the

rear spoiler

229

Function Page

£ Hazard warning lamps

c Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC 148

Central control panel

At a glance

Door control panel

Function Page

Opens the door 72

;

&%Locks/unlocks

the vehicle

Z Selects the left exterior

mirror 91

ª Folds the exterior mir-

rors in/out electrically 92

Function Page

\ Selects the right exte-

rior mirror

7 Adjusts the exterior

mirrors 92

W Opens/closes the side

windows 77

Door control panel

At a glance

Panic alarm

To activate: press the ! button : for at

least one second.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed.

To deactivate: press the ! button :

again.

Press the Start/Stop button.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system

The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-

cle occupants coming into contact with parts of

the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.

The restraint system can also reduce the forces

to which vehicle occupants are subjected during

an accident.

The restraint system comprises:

Seat belt system

Air bags

The components of the restraint system work in

conjunction with each other. They can only

deploy their protective function if, at all times, all

vehicle occupants:

have fastened their seat belts correctly

(Y page 43)

have the seat adjusted properly

(Y page 84)

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

head restraints must also be adjusted prop-

erly.

As the driver, you also have to make sure that

the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.

Observe the information relating to the correct

driver's seat position (Y page 84).

You also have to make sure that an air bag can

inflate properly if deployed (Y page 45).

An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat

belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag

increases the level of protection for vehicle

occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-

ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection

offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags

are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only

the air bags that increase protection in that par-

ticular accident situation are deployed. How-

ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not

protect against objects penetrating the vehicle

from the outside.

Information on restraint system operation can

be found under "Triggering of the Emergency

Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 52).

See "Children in the vehicle" for information on

children traveling with you in the vehicle as well

as on child restraint systems (Y page 55).

Important safety notes

WARNING

Modifications to the restraint system may

cause it to no longer work as intended. The

restraint system may then not perform its

intended protective function and may fail in an

accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.

This poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Never modify parts of the restraint system.

Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic

components or their software.

If it is necessary to modify components of the

restraint system to accommodate a person with

disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for details. USA only: for further

information contact our Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES

(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use

driving aids which have been approved specifi-

cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety

Safety

Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are

checked after the ignition is switched on and at

regular intervals while the engine is running.

Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in

good time.

The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the

instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-

nents of the restraint system are in operational

readiness.

A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint

system warning lamp:

does not light up after the ignition is switched

does not go out after a few seconds with the

engine running

lights up again while the engine is running

WARNING

If the restraint system is malfunctioning,

restraint system components may be trig-

gered unintentionally or may not deploy as

intended during an accident. This can affect

for example the Emergency Tensioning

Device or the air bag. This poses an increased

risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked and

repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are

part of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of the

front-passenger front air bag.

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-

onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are

off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the

front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy

in the event of an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-

dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

Depending on the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag must

either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-

lowing points. You must make sure of this both

before and during a journey.

Children in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is

enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-

led child restraint system, and the age and

size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe

the notes on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Chil-

dren in the vehicle" (Y page 55). There you

will also find instructions on rearward and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the

front-passenger seat.

All other persons: depending on the classi-

fication of the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-

bled or deactivated (Y page 48). Be sure to

observe the notes on "Seat

belts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags"

(Y page 45). There you can also find infor-

mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction

Seat belts are the most effective means of

restricting the movement of vehicle occupants

in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling

over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants

coming into contact with parts of the vehicle

interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-

thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

Occupant safety

Safety

occupant in the best position in relation to the

air bag.

The seat belt system comprises:

Seat belts

Emergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt

force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply by the

seat belt guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt

strap cannot be extracted any further.

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the

seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close

against the body. However it does not pull the

vehicle occupant back in the direction of the

backrest.

The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-

rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of

an incorrectly fastened seat belt.

When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to

reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the

vehicle occupant.

The seat belt force limiters are synchronized

with the front air bags which absorb part of the

deceleration force. This can reduce the force

exerted on the vehicle occupants during an acci-

dent.

If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,

do not engage the seat belt tongue in the

buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-

wise, in the event of an accident the Emer-

gency Tensioning Device and the side impact

air bag, in addition to other systems, may be

triggered and have to be replaced.

Important safety notes

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems

is required by law in:

all 50 states

the U.S. territories

the District of Columbia

all Canadian provinces

Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle

occupants should correctly fasten their seat

belts before starting the journey.

WARNING

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot

perform its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury

or even fatal injury.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have

their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-

ting properly.

The components of the restraint system work in

conjunction with each other. They can only

deploy their protective function if, at all times, all

vehicle occupants:

have fastened their seat belts correctly

(Y page 43)

have the seat adjusted properly

(Y page 84)

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

head restraints must also be adjusted prop-

erly.

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level

of protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could

slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

WARNING

Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot

wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-

tional and suitable restraint system. If the

seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-

form its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury

or even fatal injury.

For this reason, always secure persons under

5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint

systems.

Occupant safety

Safety

If a child younger than twelve years old and

under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the

vehicle:

always secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cle. The child restraint system must be appro-

priate to the age, weight and size of the child.

always observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Y page 55) in addition to the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation and oper-

ating instructions

always observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (Y page 48)

WARNING

The seat belts may not perform their intended

protective function if:

they are damaged, modified, extremely

dirty, bleached or dyed

the seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty

the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt

anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-

fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,

although the damage may not be visible, e.g.

due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged

seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.

Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices

could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy

when necessary. This poses an increased risk

of injury or even fatal injury.

Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-

sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia

reels. Make sure that the seat belts are

undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-

ing an accident, have the seat belts checked

immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed

for the standard three-point seat belt. If you

install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or

racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot

provide the best level of protection.

WARNING

If you feed seat belts through the opening in

the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be

damaged or may even break in the event of an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Only use the standard three-point seat belt.

Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Y page 42).

All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat

belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also

make sure that all vehicle occupants are always

wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle

is in motion.

When fastening the seat belt, always make sure

that:

the seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only

into the belt buckle belonging to that seat

the seat belt is pulled tight across your body

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat.

the seat belt is not twisted

Only then can the forces which occur be dis-

tributed over the area of the belt.

the shoulder section of the belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder

The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck or be routed under your

arm or behind your back.

the lap belt is taut and passes across your lap

as low down as possible

The lap belt must always be routed across

your hip joints and not across your abdomen.

This applies particularly to pregnant women.

If necessary, push the lap belt down to your

hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder

section of the belt.

the seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-

ted or fragile objects

If you have such items located on or in your

clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store

these in a suitable place.

only one person is using a seat belt

Infants and children must never travel sitting

on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event

Occupant safety

Safety

of an accident, they could be crushed

between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.

objects are never secured with a seat belt if

the seat belt is also being used by one of the

vehicle's occupants

Also ensure that there are never objects

between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and

restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the

"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-

gage or loads (Y page 218).

Fastening seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat

belts (Y page 43).

Basic illustration

Adjust the seat (Y page 84).

The seat backrest must be in an almost

upright position.

Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat belt

guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt

buckle :.

The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the

front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-

matically, see "Belt adjustment"

(Y page 44).

If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section

of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your

body.

In order to attach the child restraint system

securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the front-

passenger seat is equipped with a special seat

belt retractor. Further information on the "Spe-

cial seat belt retractor" (Y page 56).

Releasing seat belts

Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.

Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be

trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

This could damage the door, the door trim

panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts

can no longer fulfill their protective function

and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Press the release button in the belt buckle,

hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt

back.

Seat belt adjustment

The belt adjustment is a convenience function

integrated into PRE-SAFE

. With this function,

the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are

adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occu-

pant.

The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:

the belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and

the ignition is switched on

The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain

tightening force if any slack is detected between

the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not

grab hold of the seat belt.

You can switch the seat belt adjustment on and

off using the multimedia system. Information on

switching the seat belt adjustment on and off

can be found in the Digital Operating Instruc-

tions.

Belt warning for the driver and front

passenger

The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-

ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-

pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up

continuously or flash. In addition, there may be

a warning tone.

Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has

already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-

ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the

engine is started. If the doors are closed and the

driver's or front-passenger seat belt has not

been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp

lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as

the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are

Occupant safety

Safety

fastened or a front door is opened again, the

7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the

engine is started, an additional warning tone will

sound. The warning tone switches off after six

seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-

tened.

If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-

passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning

tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with

increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

driver or front passenger have fastened their

seat belts.

If the driver or front passenger unfasten their

seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-

ing is activated again.

Air bags

Introduction

The installation point of an air bag can be rec-

ognized by the AIRBAG marking.

An air bag complements the correctly fastened

seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The

air bag provides additional protection in appli-

cable accident situations.

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The

different air bag systems function independ-

ently from one another (Y page 52).

However, no system available today can com-

pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury

caused by an air bag due to the high speed at

which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you do not sit in the correct seat position,

the air bag cannot protect as intended and

could even cause additional injury when

deployed. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always make

sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:

have fastened their seat belts correctly,

including pregnant women

are sitting correctly and maintain the great-

est possible distance to the air bags

follow the following instructions

Always make sure that there are no objects

between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-

pants.

Adjust the seats properly before beginning

your journey. Always make sure that the seat

is in an almost upright position. The center of

the head restraint must support the head at

about eye level.

The setting options are different depending

on the seat model.

Move the driver's and front-passenger seats

as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-

tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.

Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.

This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.

Always lean against the backrest while driv-

ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the

door or side window. You may otherwise be in

the deployment area of the air bags.

Always keep your feet in the footwell in front

of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-

board, for example. Your feet may otherwise

be in the deployment area of the air bag.

For this reason, always secure persons less

than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-

tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot

be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also

observe the following notes:

Always secure children under twelve years of

age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable

child restraint systems.

Only secure a child in a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

when the front-passenger front air bag is

deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated

(Y page 41).

Always observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Children in the

Occupant safety

Safety

vehicle" (Y page 55) in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installation

and operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent

an air bag from functioning correctly. Before

starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting

from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make

sure that:

there are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air bag

there are no objects between the seat, door

and B-pillar

no accessories, such as cup holders, are

attached to the vehicle within the deployment

area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win-

dows

no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in

the pockets of your clothing. Store such

objects in a suitable place

WARNING

If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects

such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer

function correctly. There is an increased risk

of injury.

Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects

to it.

WARNING

Sensors to control the air bags are located in

the doors. Modifications or work not per-

formed correctly to the doors or door panel-

ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the

function of the sensors being impaired. The air

bags might therefore not function properly

anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot

protect vehicle occupants as they are

designed to do. There is an increased risk of

injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

Always have work on the doors or door pan-

eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Front air bags

Do not place heavy objects on the front-

passenger seat. This could cause the system

to identify the seat as being occupied. In the

event of an accident, the restraint systems on

the front-passenger side may be triggered

and have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-

ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;

deploys in front of and above the glove box.

When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-

tional head and thorax protection for the occu-

pants in the driver's and front-passenger seats.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

informs you about the status of the front-

passenger front air bag (Y page 41).

The front-passenger front air bag will only

deploy if:

the system, based on the OCS weight sensor

readings, detects that the front-passenger

seat is occupied (Y page 48). The

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is

not lit (Y page 48)

the restraint system control unit predicts a

high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering

column and front-passenger knee bag ; under

the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger

knee bags are triggered together with the front

air bags.

Occupant safety

Safety

The driver's and front-passenger knee bags

offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-

tection.

Side impact air bags

WARNING

Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-

vent deployment of the air bags integrated

into the seats. Consequently, the air bags

cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are

designed to do. In addition, the operation of

the occupant classification system (OCS)

could be adversely affected. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that have

been approved for the respective seat by

Mercedes-Benz.

Side impact air bags : deploy next to the outer

bolster of the seat backrest.

When deployed, the side impact air bag offers

additional thorax protection. However, it does

not protect the:

Head

Neck

Arms

Increased pelvis protection is also offered on

vehicles with AMG Performance seat.

If the restraint system control unit detects a side

impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on

the side on which the impact occurs.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys under the following conditions:

the OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the

belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,

the side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys if an appropriate accident situation

occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied

or not.

Head air bags

Head bags : deploy in the area of the side win-

dows at the front.

When deployed, the head bag enhances the

level of protection for the head. However, it does

not protect the:

chest

arms

If the restraint system control unit detects a side

impact, the head bag is deployed on the side on

which the impact occurs.

If the system determines that they can offer

additional protection to that provided by the

seat belt, a head bag may be deployed in other

accident situations (Y page 52).

The head bag on the front-passenger side

deploys under the following conditions:

the OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the

belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,

the head bag on the front-passenger side

deploys if an appropriate accident situation

occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied

or not.

Occupant safety

Safety

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Introduction

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-

egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.

Depending on that result, the front-passenger

front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are

either enabled or deactivated.

The system does not deactivate:

the side impact air bag

the headbag

the Emergency Tensioning Devices

In vehicles with the AMG Performance seat, the

sidebag and the seat belt tensioner are deacti-

vated in the following situation:

OCS has not categorized the person on the

front-passenger seat as an adult or a person

of corresponding stature and

the seat belt buckle tongue of the seat belt is

not inserted into the front-passenger seat belt

buckle

Requirements

To be classified correctly, the front passenger

must sit:

with the seat belt fastened correctly

in an almost upright position with their back

against the seat backrest

with their feet resting on the floor, if possible

If the front passenger does not observe these

conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-

tion, e.g. because the front passenger:

transfers their weight by supporting them-

selves on a vehicle armrest

sits in such a way that their weight is raised

from the seat cushion

If you install a child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the

correct positioning of the child restraint system.

Never place objects under or behind the child

restraint system, e.g. a cushion. The entire base

of the child restraint system must always rest on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.

The backrest of the forward-facing child

restraint system must lie as flat as possible

against the backrest of the front-passenger

seat.

The child restraint system must not touch the

roof or be subjected to a load by the head

restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest

and the head restraint position accordingly.

Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function

correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer's installation and operating

instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-

tion (OCS)

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

;

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The indicator lamps inform you whether the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or

enabled.

Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or

turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.

The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER

AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-

taneously for approximately six seconds.

The indicator lamps display the status of the

front-passenger front air bag.

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-

onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are

off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the

front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy

in the event of an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-

dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

Occupant safety

Safety

If the status of the front-passenger front air bag

changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag

display message appears in the instrument clus-

ter (Y page 184). When the front-passenger

seat is occupied, always pay attention to the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be

aware of the status of the front-passenger front

air bag both before and during the journey.

WARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is

disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of

an accident and cannot perform its intended

protective function. A person in the front-

passenger seat could then, for example, come

into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-

cially if the person is sitting too close to the

dashboard. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:

the classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in the

front-passenger seat

the front-passenger seat has been moved

back as far back as possible.

the person is seated correctly.

Make sure, both before and during the jour-

ney, that the status of the front-passenger

front air bag is correct.

WARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag

can deploy in the event of an accident. The

child could be struck by the air bag. This poses

an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front air

bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR-

BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY

to the child can occur.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

You can find more information on OCS under

"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-

tem" (Y page 51).

WARNING

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

and you position the front-passenger seat too

close to the dashboard, in the event of an

accident, the child could:

come into contact with the vehicle's inte-

rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

cator lamp is lit, for example

be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Move the front-passenger seat as far back as

possible. Always make sure that the shoulder

belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle

belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the

child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap

must be routed forwards and downwards

from the vehicle belt guide. Always observe

the child restraint system manufacturer's

installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:

The front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up after the system self-test and

remains lit. This indicates that the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated.

The front-passenger seat is occupied by a

child of up to twelve months old, in a standard

child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the

system self-test and remains lit. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

deactivated.

But even in the case of a twelve-month-old

child, in a standard child restraint system, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can

go out after the system self-test. This indi-

Occupant safety

Safety

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

activated. The result of the classification is

dependent on, among other factors, the child

restraint system and the child's stature. Make

sure that the conditions for a correct classi-

fication are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install

a child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat.

The front-passenger seat is occupied by a

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or

small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after

the system self-test depending on the result

of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat

as far back as possible.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature

should not use the front-passenger seat.

The front-passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person of adult stature, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

goes out after the system self-test. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to

observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Y page 55).

When the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint

system warning lamp on the instrument cluster

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp light up simultaneously. The front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated in this

case and does not deploy during an accident.

Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

checked and repaired immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose.

If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the

seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary

repair work carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that

you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for this purpose.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use seat accessories that

have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not

mean that the front-passenger front air bag will

also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-

tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the

front-passenger seat. Depending on that result,

the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-

bled or deactivated.

Self-check

DANGER

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do

not both light up during the self-test, the sys-

tem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger

front air bag might be triggered unintention-

ally or might not be triggered at all in the event

of an accident with high deceleration. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

In this case the front-passenger seat may not

be used. Do not install a child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-

pant Classification System (OCS) checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

WARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

not be deployed in the event of an accident. In

this case, the front-passenger front air bag

cannot perform its intended protective func-

tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-

passenger seat.

That person could, for example, come into

contact with the vehicle's interior, especially

if the person is sitting too close to the dash-

board. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:

the classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or deac-

Occupant safety

Safety

tivated in accordance with the person in the

front-passenger seat

the person is seated properly with a cor-

rectly fastened seatbelt

the front-passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-

passenger seat must not be used. Do not

install a child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-

cation System (OCS) checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

WARNING

Objects between the seat surface and the

child restraint system could affect OCS oper-

ation. This could result in the front-passenger

air bag not functioning as intended during an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Do not place any objects between the seat

surface and the child restraint system. The

entire base of the child restraint system must

always rest on the seat cushion of the front-

passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

facing child restraint system must, as far as

possible, be resting on the backrest of the

front-passenger seat. Always comply with the

child restraint system manufacturer's instal-

lation instructions.

After the self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

displays the status of the front-passenger front

air bag (Y page 48). If the front-passenger front

air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON

indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then

goes out.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp displays the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-

lems with the Occupant Classification System"

(Y page 51).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 50).

Occupant safety

Safety

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up and remains lit,

even though the front-

passenger seat is occu-

pied by an adult or a per-

son of a stature corre-

sponding to that of an

adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-

rect.

Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person

on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 48).

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-

passenger seat may not be used.

Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp

does not light up and/or

does not stay on.

The front-passenger seat

is:

unoccupied

occupied by the

weight of a child up to

twelve months old in a

child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.

Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child

seat.

Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the

forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible

against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,

adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat

belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger

seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child

restraint system being pulled too tightly.

Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.

Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child

restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-

ingly.

Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the

seat.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or

the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install

a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Devices and air bags

Important safety notes

WARNING

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has

been deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a

deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-

tection and cannot provide the intended pro-

tection in an accident. There is an increased

risk of injury.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-

ist workshop in order to have a deployed air

bag replaced.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

vehicle transported to a qualified specialist

workshop after an accident. Observe the notes

on towing the vehicle away (Y page 258).

Occupant safety

Safety

For your own safety and that of your front

passenger, it is important that you have

deployed air bags replaced and faulty air bags

repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags

continue to perform their protective function for

the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

WARNING

Emergency Tensioning Devices that have

deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-

tional and are unable to perform their inten-

ded protective function. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency

Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a

qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE

to trig-

ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous

situations. This procedure is reversible.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered

or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,

and some powder may also be released. The

6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.

Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-

ing. The powder that is released generally does

not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause

short-term breathing difficulties in people with

asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided

it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle

immediately or open the window in order to pre-

vent breathing difficulties.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning

Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,

which may require special handling and regard

for the environment. National guidelines must

be observed during disposal. In California, see

www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/

Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation

During the first stage of a collision, the restraint

system control unit evaluates important physi-

cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration, such as:

duration

direction

intensity

Based on the evaluation of this data, the

restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-

gency Tensioning Devices during a head-on or

rear-end collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be

triggered, if:

the ignition is switched on

the components of the restraint system are

operational. You can find further information

under "Restraint system warning lamp"

(Y page 41)

the seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in

the belt buckle of the respective seat

If the restraint system control unit detects a

more severe accident, further components of

the restraint system are activated independ-

ently of each other in certain frontal collision

situations:

Front air bags as well as driver's and front-

passenger knee bags

Side impact air bag and head bag, if the sys-

tem determines that deployment can offer

additional protection to that provided by the

seat belt

Depending on the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag is either

disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front

air bag can be deployed in an accident only if the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR

BAG indicator lamps (Y page 41).

Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. At the

first deployment threshold the front air bag fills

with gas. If the second deployment threshold is

then reached within a few milliseconds, the front

air bag is filled with the maximum quantity of

gas.

The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-

sioning Devices and the air bags is determined

by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or

acceleration which occurs at various points in

the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in

nature. Deployment should take place in good

time at the start of the collision.

The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration

and the direction of the force are essentially

determined by:

the distribution of forces during the collision

the collision angle

the deformation characteristics of the vehicle

the characteristics of the object with which

the vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measured

after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-

Occupant safety

Safety

sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do

they provide an indication of air bag deploy-

ment.

The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-

out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if

only parts which are relatively easily deformed

are affected and the rate of deceleration is not

high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even

though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-

tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid

vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-

bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs

as a result.

If the restraint system control unit detects a side

impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable

components of the restraint system are

deployed independently of each other depend-

ing on the apparent type of accident.

Side impact air bag on the side of impact,

independently of the Emergency Tensioning

Device and the use of the seat belt on the

driver's seat

The side impact air bag on the front-

passenger side deploys under the following

conditions:

the OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in

the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

Head bag on the side of impact, independ-

ently of the use of the seat belt and inde-

pendently of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupied

Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system

determines that deployment can offer addi-

tional protection in this situation

Head bags on the driver's and front-

passenger side in certain situations when the

vehicle rolls over, if the system determines

that deployment can offer additional protec-

tion to that provided by the seat belt

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.

The different air bag systems work independ-

ently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determined

by the severity of the accident detected,

especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration and the apparent type of accident:

Head-on collision

Side impact

Rollover

PRE-SAFE

(anticipatory occupant

protection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE

takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-

cle occupants.

Important safety notes

Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger

that the seats and/or objects could be dam-

aged when PRE-SAFE

is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the

PRE-SAFE

system, the possibility of personal

injuries occurring as a result of an accident can-

not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving

style to suit the prevailing road and weather

conditions and maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE

intervenes:

in emergency braking situations, e.g. when

BAS is activated

in critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-

cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-

steers or oversteers severely

on vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:

when active, Brake Assist intervenes power-

fully

PRE-SAFE

takes the following measures

depending on the hazardous situation detected:

the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

if the vehicle skids, the side windows are

closed.

vehicles with the memory function for the

front-passenger seat: the front-passenger

seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-

tion.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-

ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE

slackens the belt

pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE

can then be reversed.

Occupant safety

Safety

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:

Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly

when the vehicle is stationary.

The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and

the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of

the PRE-SAFE

convenience function. Informa-

tion about the convenience function can be

found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 44).

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent

Immediately after an accident, the following

measures are implemented, depending on the

type and severity of the impact:

the hazard warning lamps are switched on

the emergency lighting is activated

the vehicle doors are unlocked

the front side windows are lowered

vehicles with a memory function: the electri-

cally adjustable steering wheel is raised when

the driver's door is opened

the engine is switched off and the fuel supply

is cut off

vehicles with Mercedes me connect: auto-

matic emergency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes

If a child younger than twelve years old and

under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the

vehicle:

always secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

The child restraint system must be appropri-

ate to the age, weight and size of the child.

be sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes in this section in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installation

instructions.

always observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant classification system

(OCS)". (Y page 48)

WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion, for example by:

releasing the parking brake

shifting the transmission to the neutral

position

starting the engine

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

WARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected

to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or

cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even

fatal. Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

WARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to

direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,

particularly on the metal parts of the child

restraint system. There is a risk of injury.

If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with

you, always ensure that the child restraint

system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-

tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child

restraint system has been exposed to direct

sunlight, let it cool down before securing the

child in it. Never leave children unattended in

the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have

their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting

properly. Particular attention must be paid to

children.

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat

belts (Y page 43).

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve

proper seat belt positioning for children over

40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a

Children in the vehicle

Safety

three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

without a booster seat.

Special seatbelt retractor

WARNING

If the seat belt is released while driving, the

child restraint system will no longer be

secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-

tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a

portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot

be immediately refastened. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate

the special seat belt retractor and secure the

child restraint system properly.

The seat belt on the front-passenger's side is

equipped with a special seat belt retractor.

When activated, the special seat belt retractor

ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once

the child seat is secured.

Installing a child restraint system:

Make sure you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions.

Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the seat belt

guide.

Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again.

While the seat belt is retracting, you should

hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt

retractor is enabled.

Push the child restraint system down so that

the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing the child restraint system and deac-

tivating the special seat belt retractor:

Make sure you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions.

Press the release button of the seat belt

buckle and route the seat belt tongue towards

the seat belt guide.

The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint system

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems

is required by law in:

all 50 states

the U.S. territories

the District of Columbia

all Canadian provinces

WARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incor-

rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as

intended. The child cannot then be restrained

in the event of an accident, heavy braking or

sudden changes of direction. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Make sure that you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,

that the base of the child restraint system is

always resting completely on the seat cush-

ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under

or behind the child restraint system. Only use

child restraint systems with the original cover

designed for them. Only replace damaged

covers with genuine covers.

WARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incor-

rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in

the event of an accident, heavy braking or a

sudden change in direction. The child

restraint system could be thrown about, strik-

ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased

risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always install child restraint systems prop-

erly, even if they are not being used. Make

sure that you observe the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-

lines" (Y page 218).

WARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing sys-

tems which have been damaged or subjected

to a load in an accident can no longer protect

Children in the vehicle

Safety

as intended. The child cannot then be

restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

braking or sudden changes of direction. There

is an increased risk of injury, possibly even

fatal.

Replace child restraint systems which have

been damaged or subjected to a load in an

accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-

ing systems on the child restraint system

checked at a qualified specialist workshop,

before you install a child restraint system

again.

The securing system of child restraint systems is

the seat belt system.

If you install a child restraint system on the front

passenger seat, be sure to observe the instruc-

tions and safety notes on the "Occupant Clas-

sification System (OCS)" (Y page 48). There you

will also find information on disabling the front

passenger front air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-

lowing standards:

U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-

responds to the standards can be found on an

instruction label on the child restraint system.

This confirmation can also be found in the instal-

lation instructions that are included with the

child restraint system.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-

rior and on the child restraint system.

Child restraint system on the front

passenger seat

General notes

If you install a child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat, always observe the

instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant

Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 48).

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as

a result of:

an incorrectly categorized person in the front-

passenger seat

deactivating the front passenger front air bag

unintentionally

the unsuitable positioning of the child

restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-

board

Rearward-facing child restraint system

If circumstances require you to secure a child in

a rearward-facing child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat, always make sure that the

front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit continuously (Y page 41), is the front

passenger front air bag deactivated.

Always observe the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-

tions.

Forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat,

always move the front-passenger seat as far

back as possible. The entire base of the child

restraint system must always rest on the seat

cushion of the front-passenger seat. The back-

rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat

as possible against the backrest of the front-

passenger seat. The child restraint system must

not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by

the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat

backrest and the head restraint position accord-

ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt

strap is correctly routed from the front-

passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt

guide on the child restraint system. The shoul-

der belt strap must be routed forward and down

from the front-passenger seat belt guide.

Always observe the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-

tions.

Children in the vehicle

Safety

Pets in the vehicle

WARNING

If you leave animals unsupervised or unse-

cured in the vehicle, they may press buttons

or switches, for instance.

In this way, animals may:

activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example

switch systems on or off and thereby

endanger other road users

Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung

around inside the vehicle in the event of an

accident or abrupt steering or braking maneu-

ver, and thereby injure vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-

cle.

Always secure animals properly when driving,

for instance with a suitable pet carrier.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems

In this section, you will find information about

the following driving safety systems:

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Y page 58)

BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 59)

Active Brake Assist (Y page 59)

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

(Y page 62)

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

(Y page 64)

ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64)

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are

inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-

ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override

the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are

merely aids designed to assist driving. You are

responsible for maintaining the distance to the

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in

good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt

your driving style to suit the prevailing road and

weather conditions and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

The driving safety systems described only work

as effectively as possible when there is ade-

quate contact between the tires and the road

surface. Please pay special attention to the

notes on tires, recommended minimum tire

tread depths, etc. (Y page 263).

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter

tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.

Only in this way will the driving safety systems

described in this section work as effectively as

possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that

the wheels do not lock when you brake. This

allows you to continue steering the vehicle when

braking.

The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the ignition is switched

on. It goes out when the engine is running.

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph

(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.

ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you

only brake gently.

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when

braking. The steerability and braking charac-

teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-

ally, further driving safety systems are deac-

tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-

ding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-

diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,

including driving safety systems, will also

become inoperative. Observe the information

on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 201) and dis-

Driving safety systems

Safety

play messages which may be shown in the

instrument cluster (Y page 175).

Brakes

If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-

uation is over.

To make a full brake application: depress

the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a

pulsing in the brake pedal.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication

of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a

reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information

BAS operates in emergency braking situations.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS

automatically boosts the braking force, thus

shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

WARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance

in an emergency braking situation is

increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress

the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents

the wheels from locking.

Braking

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you

release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Active Brake Assist

General information

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-

ing function with an autonomous braking func-

tion and a situation-dependent brake boosting

effect.

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the

risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in

front or reduce the effects of such a collision.

If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk

of collision, you will be warned visually and

acoustically. If you do not react to the visual

collision warning or the warning tone, autono-

mous braking can be initiated in critical situa-

tions. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical

situation, Active Brake Assist supports you with

a situation-dependent brake boosting effect.

Important safety notes

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

There is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

There is snow or heavy rain

There is interference by other radar sources

There are strong radar reflections, for exam-

ple in parking garages

A narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbike

A vehicle is traveling in front on a different line

You are driving a new vehicle or servicing on

the Active Brake Assist system has just been

carried out

Observe the important safety notes in the

"Breaking-in notes" section. (Y page 109)

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,

have the configuration and operation of the

radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist

workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow

speeds where there is no visible damage to the

front of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating

Active Brake Assist is automatically active after

switching on the ignition.

Driving safety systems

Safety

You can activate or deactivate Active Brake

Assist (Y page 168) in the on-board computer.

When deactivated, the distance warning func-

tion and the autonomous braking function are

also deactivated.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ

symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-

play.

Distance warning function

General information

The distance warning function can help you to

minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a

vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a

collision. If the distance warning function

detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will

be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion for driving safety systems (Y page 58).

WARNING

The distance warning function does not react:

to people or animals

to oncoming vehicles

to crossing traffic

when cornering

The distance warning function may not give

warnings in all critical situations. There is a

risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing

road and traffic conditions.

WARNING

The distance warning function cannot always

clearly identify objects and complex traffic

situations.

In such cases, the distance warning function

may:

give an unnecessary warning

not give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and do not rely solely on the distance

warning function.

Function

Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph

(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns

you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An

intermittent warning tone will then sound, and

the · distance warning lamp will light up in

the instrument cluster.

Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.

Take evasive action provided it is safe to do

so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also cause the system to display a warning.

With the help of the radar sensor system, the

distance warning function can detect obstacles

that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-

ded period of time.

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h), the distance warning function can

also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-

ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function

If the driver does not react to the distance warn-

ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake

Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous

braking function.

The autonomous braking function:

gives the driver more time to react to critical

driving situations

can help the driver to avoid an accident or

reduces the effects of an accident

Vehicles without Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function

is available in the following speed ranges:

4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects

4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary

objects

Driving safety systems

Safety

Vehicles with Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function

is available in the following speed ranges:

4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving

objects

4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary

objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also cause the autonomous braking func-

tion to intervene.

If the autonomous braking function requires a

particularly high braking force, preventative

passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE

)

are activated simultaneously (Y page 54).

Situation-dependent brake boosting

effect

General information

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

With the help of the radar sensor system, Active

Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in the

path of your vehicle for an extended period of

time.

If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of collision

with the vehicle in front, it calculates the brake

pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If you

apply the brakes forcefully, the situation-

dependent brake boosting effect automatically

increases the brake pressure to a degree appro-

priate to the traffic situation.

The situation-dependent brake boosting effect

provides braking assistance in hazardous situa-

tions at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses

radar sensor technology to assess the traffic

situation.

The situation-dependent brake boosting effect

is capable of reacting to moving objects that

have already been detected as such at least

once over the period of observation, up to a

speed of around 155 mph (250 km/h).

The situation-dependent brake boosting effect

reacts to stationary obstacles up to a speed of

approximately 44 mph (70 km/h).

If the situation-dependent brake boosting effect

demands particularly high brake pressure, pre-

ventative passenger protection measures (PRE-

SAFE

) are triggered simultaneously

(Y page 54).

Keep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:

you release the brake pedal

there is no longer any danger of a collision

no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle

The situation-dependent brake boosting effect

is then deactivated.

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion for driving safety systems (Y page 58).

WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:

to people or animals

to oncoming vehicles

to crossing traffic

when cornering

As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not

intervene in all critical conditions. There is a

risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly

identify objects and complex traffic situa-

tions.

In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:

intervene unnecessarily

not intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the

intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

Due to the nature of the system, complex but

non-critical driving conditions may also cause

Active Brake Assist to intervene.

Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to

a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the

brake system is still available with full brake

boosting effect and BAS.

Driving safety systems

Safety

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

ESP

monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.

power transmission between the tires and the

road surface.

If ESP

detects that the vehicle is deviating from

the direction desired by the driver, one or more

wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The

engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-

cle on the desired course within physical limits.

ESP

assists the driver when pulling away on

wet or slippery roads. ESP

can also stabilize

the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

ETS traction control is part of ESP

Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-

vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull

away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for

example if the road surface is slippery on one

side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-

red to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active, even if you

deactivate ESP

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

WARNING

If ESP

is malfunctioning, ESP

is unable to

stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-

ing safety systems are deactivated. This

increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP

checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

ESP

is only deactivated if the å warning

lamp is lit continuously.

When SPORT handling mode is activated, the

M warning lamp lights up in the instrument

panel.

When the å and h warning lamps light up

continuously, ESP

is not available due to a mal-

function.

Observe the information on warning lamps

(Y page 201) and display messages which may

be shown in the instrument cluster

(Y page 175).

Only use wheels with the recommended tire

sizes. Only then will ESP

function properly.

Characteristics of ESP

General information

If the ÷ ESP

warning lamp goes out before

beginning the journey, ESP

is automatically

active.

If ESP

intervenes, the ÷ ESP

warning lamp

flashes in the instrument cluster.

If ESP

intervenes:

Do not deactivate ESP

under any circum-

stances.

Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary when pulling away.

Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing

road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically when the vehicle stops

moving. The engine starts automatically when

the driver wants to pull away again. ESP

remains in its previously selected status. Exam-

ple: if ESP

was deactivated before the engine

was switched off, ESP

remains deactivated

when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

You can select between the following states of

ESP

is activated

SPORT handling mode is activated

ESP

is deactivated

Driving safety systems

Safety

WARNING

If you deactivate ESP

, ESP

no longer sta-

bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP

in the situations descri-

bed in the following.

WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is activated,

there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-

dents.

Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-

uations described in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better to

activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate

ESP

when using snow chains

in deep snow

on sand or gravel

on specially designated roads when the vehi-

cle's own oversteering and understeering

characteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or without

ESP

requires an extremely qualified and expe-

rienced driver.

Activate ESP

as soon as the situations descri-

bed above no longer apply. ESP

will otherwise

not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle

starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP

deactivated. You

could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP

To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly

press button :.

The M handling mode warning lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up. The SPORTSPORT han‐han‐

dling modedling mode message appears on the multi-

function display.

To deactivate SPORT handling mode:

briefly press button :.

The M handling mode warning lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. ESP

is activa-

ted

To deactivate ESP

: press button :.

The å ESP

OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up. The ÷ OFFOFF

message appears on the multifunction dis-

play.

To activate ESP

: when SPORT handling

mode is activated or ESP

is deactivated,

press button :.

The å ESP

OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ONON

message appears on the multifunction dis-

play.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-

dling mode

If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or

more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP

warn-

ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP

only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.

When SPORT handling mode is activated:

ESP

only improves driving stability to a limi-

ted degree

traction control is still activated

engine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin

The spinning of the wheels results in a cut for

better traction on loose surfaces.

ESP

still provides support when you brake

firmly

Characteristics when ESP

is deactivated

If ESP

is deactivated and one or more wheels

start to spin, the ÷ ESP

warning lamp in the

instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,

ESP

will not stabilize the vehicle.

If you deactivate ESP

ESP

no longer improves driving stability

engine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin

Driving safety systems

Safety

The spinning of the wheels results in a cut for

better traction on loose surfaces.

traction control is still activated

Adaptive Brake Assist is unavailable

Active Brake Assist is also not activated if you

brake firmly with assistance from ESP

PRE-SAFE

is unavailable

PRE-SAFE

is also not activated if you brake

firmly with assistance from ESP

ESP

still provides support when you brake

firmly

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-

tion)

General information

EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure

on the rear wheels to improve driving stability

while braking.

Important safety notes

Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Y page 58).

WARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can

lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the

risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

to the different handling characteristics. Have

the brake system checked at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and

warning lamps (Y page 201) as well as display

messages (Y page 177).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and

offers increased braking comfort. In addition to

the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also fea-

tures the hill start assist function (Y page 112).

Protection against theft

Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from

being started without the correct SmartKey.

To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-

tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off

and open the driver's door.

To activate with the SmartKey: remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone

can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been

left inside the vehicle.

The immobilizer is always deactivated when

you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-

tem is not operational. Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or call

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or

KEYLESS-GO.

Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system

is armed after approximately 15 seconds.

To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-

Key or KEYLESS-GO.

With KEYLESS-GO start function or vehi-

cles with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/

Stop button.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Protection against theft

Safety

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:

a door

the vehicle with the mechanical key

the trunk lid

the hood

the glove box

To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:

press the % or & button on the Smart-

Key.

The alarm is stopped.

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

The alarm is stopped.

To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle.

The alarm is stopped.

Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey

must be inside the vehicle.

The alarm is stopped.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close

the open door that triggered it, for example.

If the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-

tem automatically notifies the Customer

Assistance Center. This is done either by text

message or data connection.

The emergency call system sends a message

or establishes a data connection provided

that:

you have subscribed to the mbrace service.

the mbrace service has been activated

properly.

the necessary mobile phone network is

available.

Protection against theft

Safety

SmartKey

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

open the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

get out and disrupt traffic.

operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

release the parking brake.

shifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-

tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could

cause the engine to be switched off. There is a

risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before

inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-

netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control

function could be affected.

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-

ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another SmartKey

with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil

inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do

not keep the SmartKey in the trunk. Otherwise,

the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when

starting the engine using the Start/Stop button.

A brief radio connection between the vehicle

and the SmartKey determines whether a valid

SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the

vehicle.

This occurs, for example:

when starting the engine

while driving

when using the trunk lid unlocking sensor

when the external door handles are touched

during convenience closing

SmartKey functions

& Locks the vehicle

;

F Opens the trunk lid

% Unlocks the vehicle

To unlock centrally: press the % button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-

imately 40 seconds of unlocking:

the vehicle is locked again

the anti-theft alarm system is armed again.

To lock centrally: press the & button.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the

doors, the glove box and the fuel filler flap.

The turn signals flash once when unlocking and

three times when locking.

You can also set an audible signal to confirm

that the vehicle has been locked. The audible

signal can be activated and deactivated via the

multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's

Manual.

When the locator lighting is activated via the

multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark

SmartKey

Opening and closing

after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey.

Information on activating and deactivating the

locator lighting can be found in the Digital Oper-

ator's Manual.

To open the trunk lid: press and hold the

F button until the trunk lid opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by

any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (Y page 112).

Locking/unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the

SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-

tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using

KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the

& button on the SmartKey.

The driver's door and the door at which the han-

dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle. When locking or

unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance

between the SmartKey and the corresponding

door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the Smart-

Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. This occurs, for example:

when starting the engine

while driving

when using the remote trunk lid opening sen-

sor

when the external door handles are touched

during convenience closing

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-

face of the door handle.

To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :

or ;.

Make sure that you do not touch the inner

surface of the door handle.

Convenience closing feature: touch

recessed sensor surface ; for an extended

period.

Further information on the convenience clos-

ing feature (Y page 78).

Deactivating and activating

If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a lon-

ger period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-

GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power,

thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-

poses of activation/deactivation, the vehicle

must not be nearby.

To deactivate: press the & button on the

SmartKey twice in rapid succession.

The indicator light on the SmartKey flashes

twice briefly then one long flash, then KEY-

LESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 69).

To activate: press any button on the Smart-

Key.

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features

are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by

any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (Y page 112).

SmartKey

Opening and closing

Changing the settings of the locking

system

You can change the settings of the locking sys-

tem. This means that only the driver's door, the

glove box and the fuel filler flap are unlocked

when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you

frequently travel on your own.

To change the setting: press and hold down

the % and & buttons simultaneously

for approximately six seconds until the indi-

cator lamp flashes twice (Y page 69).

If the setting of the locking system is changed

within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing

the & or % button:

locks or

unlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

To unlock: press the % button once.

To unlock centrally: press the % button

twice.

To lock: press the & button.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as

follows:

To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner

surface of the door handle on the driver's

door.

To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface

of the front-passenger door handle.

To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor

surface on one of the door handles.

Restoring factory settings:

Press the % and & buttons simultane-

ously for approximately six seconds until the

indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 69).

Mechanical key

General notes

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or

unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,

use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-

tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(Y page 64).

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-

matically.

To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

Push release catch : in the direction of the

arrow and at the same time remove mechan-

ical key ; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:

unlocking the driver's door (Y page 73)

locking the vehicle (Y page 73)

Inserting the mechanical key

Push mechanical key ; completely into the

SmartKey until it engages and release

catch : is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-

ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in

severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal

injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If

a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention

immediately.

SmartKey

Opening and closing

Environmental note

Batteries contain dangerous

substances. It is against the

law to dispose of them with

the household rubbish. They

must be collected separately

and recycled to protect the

environment.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally friendly

manner. Take discharged

batteries to a qualified spe-

cialist workshop or a special

collection point for used bat-

teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling

and regard for the environment. National guide-

lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-

ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Checking the battery

Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery

check lamp : lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery check

lamp : does not light up briefly.

Change the battery (Y page 69).

If the SmartKey battery is checked within the

signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing

the & or % button:

locks or

unlocks the vehicle

You can get a battery at any qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey

(Y page 68).

Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-

tery compartment cover : opens. Do not

hold battery compartment cover : closed

while doing so.

Remove battery compartment cover :.

Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.

Insert the new battery with the positive ter-

minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to

do so.

Make sure that the surface of the battery is

free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

SmartKey

Opening and closing

Insert the front tabs of battery compartment

cover : into the housing first and then press

to close it.

Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

(Y page 68).

Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on

the vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

You can no longer lock or

unlock the vehicle using

the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary

(Y page 69).

If this does not work:

Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or

unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 67).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary

(Y page 69).

If this does not work:

Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

SmartKey

Opening and closing

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.

Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the

SmartKey.

Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-

trol function:

Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The engine cannot be

started using the Smart-

Key.

the on-board voltage is too low.

Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:

Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 255).

Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 256).

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be

started using the Start/

Stop button. The Smart-

Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.

Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary

(Y page 69).

If this does not work:

Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-

Key.

Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the

mechanical key.

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey

Opening and closing

Doors

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

open the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

get out and disrupt traffic.

operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

release the parking brake.

shifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

When a door is opened, the side window on that

side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the

side window closes again.

The side windows will not open/close if the

battery is discharged or if the side windows

have iced up. It will then not be possible to

close the door. Do not attempt to force the

door closed. You could otherwise damage the

door or the side window.

Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside

You can open a door from inside the vehicle

even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has been

locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,

opening a door from the inside will trigger the

anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm

(Y page 64).

Pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.

The door is unlocked and opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle

from the inside. The buttons are on the driver’s

door.

To unlock: press button :.

To lock: press button ;.

If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-

cle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked

or unlocked.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the

inside if the vehicle has been locked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

The doors can be opened from the inside.

If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey

or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the

inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

Switch off the alarm (Y page 64).

Doors

Opening and closing

If a locked door is opened from the inside, the

previous unlock status of the vehicle will be

taken into consideration if:

the vehicle was locked using the locking but-

ton for the central locking, or

locked automatically

The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-

ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's

door had been previously unlocked, only the

door which has been opened from the inside is

unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

To deactivate: press and hold button : for

approximately five seconds until a tone

sounds.

To activate: press and hold button ; for

approximately five seconds until a tone

sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not

hear a tone, the relevant setting has already

been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the

ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-

ing.

You could therefore be locked out if:

the vehicle is being pushed

the vehicle is being towed

the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer

You can activate and deactivate the auto-

matic locking mechanism via the multimedia

system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Unlocking/locking the driver's door

using the mechanical key

To completely lock the vehicle using the

mechanical key:

begin by pressing the button for locking the

vehicle from the inside while the driver's door

is open

then, proceed to lock the driver's door using

the mechanical key

Insert the mechanical key as far as it will go

into opening : in the protective cap.

Pull and hold the door handle.

Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key

as straight as possible away from the vehicle

until it releases.

Release the door handle.

To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-

clockwise as far as it will go to key position

To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as

far as it will go to key position 1.

Carefully press the protective cap onto the

lock cylinder until it engages and is seated

firmly.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-

Doors

Opening and closing

tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(Y page 64).

Trunk

Important safety notes

DANGER

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open while the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

WARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or

not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-

den change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be

flung around. Secure objects, luggage or

loads against slipping or tipping before the

journey.

The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient

clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be

found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Y page 293).

If the rear spoiler has been extended manually,

the height when opened is higher by this

amount. If in doubt, retract the rear spoiler again

manually before opening the trunk lid

(Y page 229).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You

could otherwise lock yourself out.

You should preferably place luggage or loads in

the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines

(Y page 218).

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

Press the F button on the SmartKey.

The trunk lid opens slightly.

Lift the trunk lid.

Closing

Pull the trunk lid down using recess : and let

it drop into the lock.

Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &

button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO

(Y page 67).

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO

Important safety notes

WARNING

The vehicle exhaust system can become very

hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you

could burn yourself by touching the exhaust

system. There is a risk of injury. Always

ensure that you make the kicking movement

only within the detection range of the sensors.

Trunk

Opening and closing

If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-

tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-

tional opening of the trunk lid:

when using an automatic car wash

when using a power washer

Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft

(3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notes

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO without carbon

package: you can unlock the trunk lid without

using your hands. This is useful if you have your

hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement

under the rear bumper with your foot.

Observe the following points:

Carry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-

son. The SmartKey must be at the rear of the

vehicle in the detection range of KEYLESS-

GO.

When making the kicking movement, make

sure that you are standing firmly on the

ground and that there is sufficient clearance

to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise

lose your balance, for example on ice.

Always ensure that you only make the kicking

movement within the detection range of sen-

sors :.

Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the

rear area while doing so.

Do not come into contact with the bumper

while making the kicking movement. Other-

wise, the sensors may not function correctly.

Unlocking the trunk via the sensor does not

function while the engine is being started.

Dirt caused by road salt or snow around sen-

sors : may restrict functionality.

Using the trunk unlocking function via the

sensor with a prosthetic leg may restrict func-

tionality.

If a KEYLESS-GO SmartKey is within the rear

detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the sensors

could be triggered. As a result, the trunk lid

could be opened unintentionally under the

following conditions:

if you set something down or lift something

behind the vehicle

if you polish the rear of the vehicle

Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your

person in these situations or in situations sim-

ilar to these. This will prevent the trunk lid

from being unlocked unintentionally.

Operation

To unlock: kick into sensor detection

range : below the bumper with your foot.

The trunk lid opens slightly.

To open: lift the trunk lid.

If the trunk lid does not unlock after sev-

eral attempts: wait at least ten seconds then

kick under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too

long, the trunk lid does not unlock. Repeat the

leg movement more quickly if this occurs.

Unlocking from inside the vehicle

DANGER

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open while the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Trunk

Opening and closing

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

You can unlock the trunk lid from the driver's

seat when the vehicle is stationary and

unlocked.

Press remote operating switch : for the

trunk lid until the trunk lid is unlocked.

The trunk lid opens slightly.

Locking the trunk lid separately

The "Locking the trunk lid separately" function is

only available in certain countries.

You can lock the trunk lid separately. If you then

unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk lid

remains locked and cannot be opened.

To activate: close the trunk lid.

Open the glove box.

Slide the switch to position 1.

If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk

lid remains locked.

You can also lock the glove box

(Y page 219).

To deactivate: open the glove box.

Slide the switch to position 2.

If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk

lid will also be unlocked.

Trunk emergency release

You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with

emergency release button :.

Press emergency release button : briefly.

The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

Push the trunk lid upwards to open it com-

pletely.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with emergency

release button : when the vehicle is stationary

or in motion.

Emergency release button ::

flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is

opened

flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is

closed

Emergency release button : does not unlock

the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or

discharged.

If the vehicle was locked centrally, opening the

trunk lid with emergency release button : trig-

gers the anti-theft alarm system.

Side windows

Important safety notes

WARNING

While opening the side windows, body parts

could become trapped between the side win-

dow and the door frame as the side window

moves. There is a risk of injury.

Side windows

Opening and closing

Make sure that nobody touches the side win-

dow during the opening procedure. If some-

body becomes trapped, release the switch or

pull the switch to close the side window again.

WARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in

the closing area could become trapped. There

is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the

body are in the closing area. If somebody

becomes trapped, release the switch or press

the switch to open the side window again.

WARNING

If children operate the side windows they

could become trapped, particularly if they are

left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-

matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks

or restricts a side window from traveling

upwards during the automatic closing process,

the side window opens again automatically. Dur-

ing the manual closing process, the side window

only opens again automatically after the corre-

sponding switch is released. The automatic

reversing feature is only an aid and does not

relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention

when closing a side window.

WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers

while adjusting

This means that the reversing feature cannot

prevent someone being trapped in these sit-

uations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close

proximity during the closing procedure. If

someone becomes trapped, press the W

button to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-

dows

The switches for all side windows are located on

the driver's door. There is also a switch on the

front-passenger door for the corresponding side

window.

The switch on the driver's door has priority.

Left

;

Right

Switch on the power supply or switch on the

ignition with the Start/Stop button.

To open manually: press and hold the cor-

responding switch.

To open fully: press the switch beyond the

point of resistance and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

To close manually: pull the corresponding

switch and hold it.

To close fully: pull the switch beyond the

point of resistance and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

To interrupt automatic operation: press/

pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point of

resistance and release, automatic operation is

started in the corresponding direction. You can

stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling

the switch again.

You can still operate the side windows when you

switch off the power supply or the ignition. This

function remains active for five minutes or until

you open a door.

Side windows

Opening and closing

Convenience opening

General notes

You can ventilate the vehicle before you start

driving.

If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-

cle, the convenience opening function is availa-

ble.

To do so, open the side windows using the

SmartKey.

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-

able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience opening

After unlocking the vehicle, press and hold

the % button on the SmartKey until the

side windows begin to open.

When the vehicle is unlocked, press and hold

the % button until the side windows have

reached the desired position.

To interrupt convenience opening: release

the % button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

WARNING

When using the convenience closing feature,

parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-

ing area when a side window is being closed.

There is a risk of injury.

Observe the complete closing procedure

when the convenience closing feature is oper-

ating. Make sure that no body parts are in

close proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can close the

windows at the same time.

Using the SmartKey

Press and hold the & button until the side

windows are fully closed.

Make sure that all the side windows are

closed.

To interrupt convenience closing: release

the & button.

Using KEYLESS-GO

The driver's door and the door at which the han-

dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle. The gap between

the SmartKey and the corresponding door han-

dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

Touch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle until the side windows are fully

closed.

Make sure you only touch recessed sensor

surface :.

Make sure that all the side windows are

closed.

To interrupt convenience closing: release

recessed sensor surface : on the door han-

dle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,

you must reset it.

Close all the doors.

Switch on the power supply or switch on the

ignition with the Start/Stop button.

Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window is com-

pletely closed (Y page 77).

Hold the switch for an additional second.

Side windows

Opening and closing

If the side window opens again slightly:

Immediately pull the corresponding switch on

the door control panel until the side window is

completely closed (Y page 77).

Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the respective side window remains closed

after the button is released, then it has been

set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the

steps above.

Problems with the side windows

WARNING

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window

closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the

body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

A side window cannot be

closed because it is

blocked by objects, e.g.

leaves in the window

guide.

Remove the objects.

Close the side window.

A side window cannot be

closed and you cannot

see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again

slightly:

Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch

again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again

slightly:

Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch

again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

The side windows cannot

be opened or closed with

convenience opening.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary

(Y page 69).

If a side window will still not open or close due to a malfunction, consult a qualified specialist

workshop.

Side windows

Opening and closing

Soft top (Roadster)

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the

soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short

time. This causes the soft top to lower unex-

pectedly and may cause you or others to be

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Always open or close the soft top completely.

Never sit on the soft top or store heavy

objects on it. You will otherwise damage the

vehicle soft top and soft-top covers.

When opening and closing the soft top,

make sure that:

there is sufficient clearance above it, as the

soft top swings upwards

there are no objects on the soft top or the

soft-top covers to the side

the fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen

the outside temperature is above -10 †

You could otherwise damage the soft top as

well as other parts of the vehicle.

Take the height of the vehicle into account when

opening and closing the soft top (Y page 293).

Make sure that the soft top is dry and clean

before opening or closing it. Otherwise, water or

dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk.

You can open or close the soft top:

when the vehicle is stationary or

when you do not exceed a speed of 31 mph

(50 km/h) (Max. 37 mph (60 km/h), to avoid

interrupting the closing process while slightly

exceeding this speed)

If there is a strong head wind, it may not be pos-

sible to close the soft top fully. In order to close

the soft top fully, reduce your speed or stop the

vehicle in accordance with the traffic condi-

tions.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only open or close the soft top

when the vehicle is stationary.

If the soft top does not open or close fully, the

soft-top hydraulics are depressurized and the

soft top is lowered:

after approximately 7 minutes when the igni-

tion is switched on

after about

20 seconds if the ignition is switched off

Opening/closing with the soft top

switch

Important safety notes

WARNING

When opening or closing the soft top, there is

a risk that parts of the body could become

trapped by moving parts such as the roof

mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-

dows. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing the roof, make sure

that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of

moving parts. Release the switch if somebody

becomes trapped.

WARNING

If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph

(60 km/h), the soft top stops during the open-

ing or closing procedure. This impairs your

view to the rear. There is a risk of an accident.

Reduce your speed to below 37 mph

(60 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance

with the traffic conditions. Press or pull the

soft-top switch again in order to open or close

the soft top fully.

Opening and closing

Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/

Stop button (Y page 110).

When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Soft top (Roadster)

Opening and closing

To open: push soft top switch : upwards

and hold it until the soft top is fully opened.

The multifunction display shows the opening

process of the soft top.

When the soft top is fully opened, a tone

sounds.

If, when opening, you drive at speeds above

35 mph (60 km/h), the opening process is

stopped. The Open/Close ConvertibleOpen/Close Convertible

Top CompletelyTop Completely message is shown in the

multifunction display. In order to open the

soft top fully, reduce your speed to below

35 mph (60 km/h) and push the soft top

switch upwards again.

If you push and hold soft top switch :, the

side windows open.

To close: pull and hold soft top switch : until

the soft top is completely closed.

The multifunction display shows the closing

process of the soft top.

When the soft top is fully closed, a tone

sounds.

If, when closing, you drive at speeds above

35 mph (60 km/h), the closing process is

stopped. The Open/Close ConvertibleOpen/Close Convertible

Top CompletelyTop Completely message is shown in the

multifunction display. In order to close the

soft top fully, reduce your speed to below

35 mph (60 km/h) and pull the soft top switch

downwards again.

If you pull and hold soft top switch :, the

side windows close.

Opening/closing using the SmartKey

Important safety notes

WARNING

When opening or closing the soft top, there is

a risk that parts of the body could become

trapped by moving parts such as the roof

mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-

dows. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing the roof, make sure

that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of

moving parts. Release the switch if somebody

becomes trapped.

Opening and closing

The SmartKey must be in close proximity to

the vehicle.

To open: press and hold the % button on

the SmartKey until the soft top is completely

open.

The multifunction display shows the opening

process of the soft top.

When the soft top is fully opened, a tone

sounds. The seat ventilation is switched on

and the side windows open.

To close: press and hold the & button on

the SmartKey until the soft top is completely

closed.

The multifunction display shows the closing

process of the soft top.

When the soft top is fully closed, a tone

sounds. The side windows close.

Relocking the soft top

WARNING

If you do not lock the closed soft top, it may

open during a journey. This could cause you to

lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Only drive with the soft top fully open or

locked closed.

Soft top (Roadster)

Opening and closing

The soft top is not locked if:

theOpen/Close Convertible Top Com‐Open/Close Convertible Top Com‐

pletelypletely message is shown in the multifunc-

tion display

you hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds

when pulling away or while driving

Lock the soft top again if it is not locked fully:

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon

as possible, paying attention to road and traf-

fic conditions.

Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/

Stop button (Y page 110).

Press the soft top switch (Y page 80).

Installing/removing the wind screen

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it

could detach itself during a journey and

endanger other road users. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

Install the wind screen as described. Do not

place any objects on top of the installed wind

screen.

Install or remove the wind screen only when

the soft top is open. You could otherwise

damage the wind screen or the vehicle inte-

rior.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

use wind screens which have been tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This

helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Installing/removing

The wind screen protects against wind when

driving with the soft top open. It is secured

between the roll bars.

The wind screen is in wind screen bag : on the

tank partition wall in the trunk.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon

as possible, paying attention to road and traf-

fic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 127).

Open the trunk.

Detach wind screen bag : from four press-

studs ; on the tank partition wall.

Remove the wind screen from wind screen

bag :.

Attach wind screen bag : to the tank parti-

tion wall again.

To install: fold both fastening levers ? on

wind screen = inwards in the direction of the

arrow.

Push wind screen = into the recess between

the roll bars up to the locking point.

Fold both fastening levers ? on wind screen

= outwards.

To remove: fold both fastening levers ? on

wind screen = inwards in the direction of the

arrow.

Pull wind screen = upward.

Detach the wind screen bag and remove it

from the trunk and stow wind screen = in it.

Attach the wind screen bag to the tank parti-

tion wall in the trunk again.

Soft top (Roadster)

Opening and closing

Problems with the soft top

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The soft top will not open

or close.

The ignition is not switched on.

Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

The brake pedal has not been depressed with the vehicle stationary.

Depress the brake pedal.

The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The

soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety reasons.

You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten

minutes.

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

Open or close the soft top again.

Soft top (Roadster)

Opening and closing

Correct driver's seat position

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steering

wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:

you are as far away from the driver's air bag as

possible

you are sitting in a normal upright position

your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion

your legs are not entirely stretched and you

can depress the pedals properly

the back of your head is supported at eye level

by the center of the head restraint

you can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent

you can move your legs freely

you can see all the displays in the instrument

cluster clearly

you should have a good overview of traffic

conditions

the seat belt is pulled snugly against your

body and is routed across the center of your

shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic

area

Further related subjects:

Manual seat adjustment (Y page 85)

Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 86)

Fastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 44).

Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior

mirrors (Y page 92)

Storing seat settings, steering wheel and

exterior mirrors using the memory function

(Y page 94)

Seats

Important safety notes

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust

the seats, particularly when unattended.

There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

WARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle

occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the

seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one

has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"

(Y page 45) and "Children in the vehicle"

(Y page 55).

Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

For safety reasons, seat fore-and-aft adjustment

on electrically adjustable seats is only possible

for a maximum of two seconds when the vehicle

is in motion. The seat fore-and-aft adjustment

can then no longer be set.

WARNING

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or

other vehicle occupants could be trapped and

thereby injured. Children in particular could

accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-

ment buttons and become trapped. There is a

risk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that your

hands or other body parts do not get under the

lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-

tem.

WARNING

If head restraints are not adjusted correctly,

they cannot provide protection as intended.

There is an increased risk of injury in the head

and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident

or when braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle

occupant that the center of the head restraint

supports the back of the head at about eye

level.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the

head restraint so that it is as close as possible to

your head.

WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level

of protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could

slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

To prevent damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following notes:

Do not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the

seats as soon as possible if liquid does get

spilled on the seats.

If the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use

the seat heating to dry the seats.

Clean the seat covers as recommended;

see keyword "Care".

Do not transport heavy loads on the seats.

Do not place pointed objects on the seat

cushions such as knives, nails or tools.

Where possible, use the seats only for car-

rying passengers.

When operating the seat heating, do not

cover the seats with insulating materials,

e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-

ers, child seats or booster seats.

Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell under or behind the seats when mov-

ing the seats back. There is a risk that the

seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats manually

General notes

The manually adjustable seat is only available in

Canada.

Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position

Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or

backwards.

Release lever : again.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage in

position.

Backrest angle

Relieve the pressure on the backrest.

Pull lever = up and adjust the backrest to the

desired angle.

Release lever = again.

The seat backrest must audibly engage.

Seat height

Pull up or push down lever ; repeatedly until

the seat has reached the desired height.

Adjusting the seats electrically

Seat cushion angle

;

Seat height

Backrest angle

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

For safety reasons, seat fore-and-aft adjustment

on electrically adjustable seats is only possible

for a maximum of two seconds when the vehicle

is in motion. The seat fore-and-aft adjustment

can then no longer be set.

If after starting the journey no correct seat

fore-and-aft adjustment has been made,

there is a risk of accident and injury. Pull over

and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble and readjust the seat position.

i Further related subjects:

You can store the seat settings using the

memory function (Y page 94).

If PRE-SAFE

is triggered, the front-

passenger seat will be moved to a better

position if it was previously in an unfavora-

ble position (Y page 54).

Adjusting the head restraints

To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.

To lower: push the head restraint down to the

desired position.

The head restraint can only be adjusted on

manually and electrically adjustable seats,

but not with AMG Performance Seats.

Adjusting the lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the seat backrests

individually to provide optimum support for your

back.

Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

To raise the backrest contour

;

To soften the backrest contour

To lower the backrest contour

To harden the backrest contour

Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat

General notes

To adjust the contour of the seat and for

improved lateral support, you can individually

adjust the front seats.

The AMG Performance seat is designed for the

standard three-point seat belt. If you install

another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing

seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide

the best level of protection.

For further information about the seat belt

(Y page 43)

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat

cushion and the seat backrest

Driver's seat

Side bolsters of the seat cushion

To narrow: press button :.

To broaden: press button ;.

Side bolsters of the seat backrest

To narrow: press button =.

To broaden: press button ?.

Front-passenger seat

Side bolsters of the seat backrest

To narrow: press button :.

To broaden: press button ;.

The side bolsters of the front-passenger

seat cushion cannot be adjusted.

Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off

WARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can

cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to

become very hot. The health of persons with

limited temperature sensitivity or a limited

ability to react to high temperatures may be

affected or they may even suffer burn-like

injuries. There is a risk of injury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on

repeatedly.

When the seat heating is switched on, the

seat surface can be damaged as a result of

objects being placed on the seats, for exam-

ple, seat cushions, child seats and protective

covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Ensure that there are no objects on the seat

surface when the seat heating is switched on.

Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

The three red indicator lamps in buttons :

indicate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down from

level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight

minutes.

The system automatically switches down from

level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten

minutes.

The system automatically switches off approx-

imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.

Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start/

Stop button.

To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

If the battery voltage is too low, the seat

heating may switch off.

Activating/deactivating seat ventila-

tion

The three blue indicator lamps in buttons :

indicate the blower setting you have selected.

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 111).

To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired blower setting is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

Seat ventilation is only available for AMG

Performance seats.

If the battery voltage is too low, the seat

ventilation may switch off.

You can open the side windows using the

"Convenience opening" feature (Y page 78).

The seat ventilation of the driver's seat auto-

matically switches to the highest level.

Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The seat heating or seat

ventilation has switched

off prematurely or can-

not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-

ers are switched on.

Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat

ventilation will switch back on automatically.

AIRSCARF (Roadster)

WARNING

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air

can flow from the vents in the head restraints.

This could result in burns in the immediate

vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Reduce the heater output before it becomes

too hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and

neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.

The warm air flows out of the holes in the head

restraints.

The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected.

Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1

or 2 in the ignition lock.

To switch on: press button :.

Three red indicator lamps in the button light

up. The blower starts up after a preheating

phase of seven seconds.

Press button : repeatedly until the desired

heating level is set.

To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

Make sure that no objects enter the front outlet.

The blower continues running for seven sec-

onds to cool down the heating elements.

If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF

may switch off.

Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Problems with AIRSCARF

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

AIRSCARF has switched

off prematurely or will

not switch on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-

ers are switched on.

Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Switch on AIRSCARF again.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

WARNING

If the steering wheel is unlocked while the

vehicle is in motion, it could change position

unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Before starting off, make sure the steering

wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering

wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Children could injure themselves if they

adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of

injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can

still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in

the ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

Adjusts the steering wheel height

;

Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 90)

Storing settings (Y page 94)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

WARNING

When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts

the steering wheel, you and other vehicle

occupants – particularly children – could

become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-

ing adjustments, make sure that no one has

any body parts in the sweep of the steering

wheel.

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if

there is a risk of entrapment by the steering

wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Steering wheel

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Press one of the memory function position but-

tons. The adjustment process is stopped. This

function is only available on vehicles with mem-

ory function.

WARNING

If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-

ture, they can become trapped, particularly

when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

WARNING

If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT

feature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Always wait until the adjustment process is

complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in

and out of your vehicle easier.

You can activate and deactivate the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-

tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual)

Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheel swings up when you:

remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

open the driver's door with the Start/Stop

button in position 1

The steering wheel only moves up if it has

not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing

The steering wheel is moved to the previously

set position if you:

close the driver's door and

press the Start/Stop button once

When you close the driver's door with the igni-

tion switched on, the steering wheel is also

automatically moved to the previously set posi-

tion.

The last position of the steering wheel column is

stored after each manual setting or when you

store the setting with the memory function

(Y page 94).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-

gered in an accident, the steering column will

move upwards in the following situations:

when you open the driver's door

when you remove the key

This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and res-

cue the occupants.

Mirrors

Inside rearview mirror

Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-

wards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

fasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

WARNING

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side reduces the size of the image. Visible

objects are actually closer than they appear.

This means that you could misjudge the dis-

tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.

when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

For this reason, always make sure of the

actual distance from the road users traveling

behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start/

Stop button.

Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:

press button ;.

Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-

ton :.

The indicator lamp lights up in the button that

has been pressed.

The indicator lamp goes out again after some

time. You can adjust the selected mirror using

button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

Press button = up, down, or to the right or

left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror

to the correct position. You should have a

good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field

of vision.

After the engine has been started, the exterior

mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-

dow defroster is switched on and the outside

temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically

Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start/

Stop button.

Briefly press button ?.

Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

Make sure that the exterior mirrors are

always folded out fully while driving. They

could otherwise vibrate.

If you are driving faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-

rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-

pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be

reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not

fold in when you select the AutomaticAutomatic MirrorMirror

FoldingFolding function in the multimedia system.

Select key position 1 with the Start/Stop

button.

Briefly press button ?.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically

When the Automatic Mirror FoldingAutomatic Mirror Folding func-

tion is activated in the multimedia system:

the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside

the exterior mirrors fold out again automati-

cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

If the exterior mirrors have been folded in

manually, they do not fold out.

Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

position, proceed as follows:

Press and hold button ? until you hear a click

and the mirror engages audibly into position

(Y page 92).

The mirror housing is engaged again and you

can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual

(Y page 92).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

WARNING

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-

matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte

is harmful and causes irritation. It must not

come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-

piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the electrolyte,

observe the following:

Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin

immediately with water.

Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of

your eyes thoroughly with clean water.

If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not

induce vomiting.

If electrolyte comes into contact with your

skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

Immediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with electrolyte.

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on

the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare

mode if the following conditions are met simul-

taneously:

the ignition is switched on

incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-

sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if

reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting

is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-

ror on the front passenger side

Storing the parking position

You can position the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror in such a way that you can see the

rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage

reverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

Memory button M

;

Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror

Switch

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button.

Press button =.

Start the engine.

Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the default setting parking posi-

tion.

Use button ? to adjust the exterior mirror to

a position that allows you to see the rear

wheel and the curb.

The parking position is stored.

If you shift the transmission to another posi-

tion, the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side returns to the driving position

after approximately ten seconds.

Using the memory button

You can store the parking position of the exte-

rior mirror on the front-passenger side using

memory button M :. The reverse gear must not

be engaged.

Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button.

Press button =.

Use button ? to adjust the exterior mirror to

a position that allows you to see the rear

wheel and the curb.

Press memory button M : and one of the

arrows on button ? within three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior

mirror does not move.

If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the

steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-

ting

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button.

Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side using button =.

Start the engine.

Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side

moves back to its original position:

as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)

about ten seconds after you have disengaged

reverse gear

if you press button ; for the exterior mirror

on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you use the memory function on the driver's

side while driving, you could lose control of

the vehicle as a result of the adjustments

being made. There is a risk of an accident.

Only use the memory function on the driver's

side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

When the memory function adjusts the seat or

steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-

pants – particularly children – could become

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making adjust-

ments, make sure that no one has any body

parts in the sweep of the seat or steering

wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-

diately release the memory function position

button. The adjustment process is stopped.

WARNING

Children could become trapped if they acti-

vate the memory function, particularly when

unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,

even if the ignition is switched off.

Storing settings

With the memory function, you can store up to

three different settings, e.g. for three different

people.

The following settings are stored as a single

memory preset:

seat and backrest position

driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors

on the driver's and front-passenger sides

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button.

Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 86).

Memory function

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel

(Y page 90) and the exterior mirrors

(Y page 92).

Press memory button M and one of the stor-

age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three

seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected preset

position. A tone sounds when the settings

have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

Press and hold the corresponding storage

position button 1, 2 or 3 until:

Seat

Steering wheel

Exterior mirrors

are in the stored position.

The steering wheel and seat adjustment

procedure is interrupted as soon as you

release the storage position button. Exterior

mirror adjustment continues.

Memory function

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Exterior lighting

General notes

For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you drive with the lights switched on

even during the daytime. In some countries,

operation of the headlamps varies due to legal

requirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using the:

light switch

combination switch (Y page 97)

Light switch

Operation

1 W

Left-hand standing lamps

2 X

Right-hand standing lamps

3 T

Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting

4 Ã

Automatic headlamp mode, controlled

by the light sensor

5 L

Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

B R

Rear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the

vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

Turn the light switch to the Ã position.

The exterior lighting, except the side/parking

lamps, switches off automatically in the follow-

ing situations:

the engine is switched off with the Start/Stop

button

the driver's door is opened

Automatic headlamp mode

WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-

beam headlamps may not be switched on

automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an

accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

The automatic headlamp mode is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-

ing at all times.

Ã is the preferred light switch position.

The light setting is automatically selected

according to the brightness of the ambient light,

but not in the event of poor visibility due to

weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.

If the Start/Stop button is pressed once:

depending on the brightness of the ambient

light, the parking lamps will switch on or off

automatically.

If you have switched on the Daytime Run‐Daytime Run‐

ning Lightsning Lights function via the on-board com-

puter, the daytime running lamps or the park-

ing lamps and low-beam headlamps will

switch on or off automatically while the

engine is running.

To switch on automatic headlamp mode:

turn the light switch to the Ã position.

Canada only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility

of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-

ning lamps function is required by law in Can-

ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

When the engine is running and the vehicle is

stationary: if you move the selector lever from a

driving position to position j, the daytime run-

ning lamps and low-beam headlamps go out

after three minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-

tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the

light switch to the T position, the daytime

running lamps and parking lamps switch on.

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch to the L position, the manual settings

take precedence over the daytime running

lamps.

USA only:

Exterior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility

of your vehicle during the day. Here, the Day‐Day‐

time Running Lightstime Running Lights function must be

switched on via the on-board computer

(Y page 169).

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch to the T or L position, the manual

settings take precedence over the daytime run-

ning lamps.

Low-beam headlamps

WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-

beam headlamps may not be switched on

automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an

accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

When the ignition is switched on and the light

switch is in the L position, the parking lamps

and low-beam headlamps are switched on even

if the light sensor does not sense dark condi-

tions. This is a particularly useful function in the

event of rain and fog.

To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button or start the engine.

Turn the light switch to the L position.

The green L indicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your

vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick

fog. You must observe the legal requirements

for the country in which you are currently driving

when operating the rear fog lamp.

To switch on the rear fog lamp: select key

position 2 with the Start/Stop button or

start the engine.

Turn the light switch to the L or Ã

position.

Press the R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the

R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster goes out.

Parking lamps

If the battery charge is very low, the parking

lamps or standing lamps are automatically

switched off to enable the next engine start.

Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit

area, in accordance with the relevant legal

stipulations. Avoid using the T parking

lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-

sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-

hand W standing lamps.

To switch on the parking lamps: turn the

light switch to the T position.

The green T indicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

To switch on the standing lamps: switch off

the engine with the Start/Stop button.

Turn the light switch to the W position (left-

hand side of the vehicle) or X position

(right-hand side of the vehicle).

Combination switch

High-beam headlamps

;

Turn signal, right

High-beam flasher

Turn signal, left

Exterior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in the

direction of arrow ; or ?.

The corresponding turn signal flashes three

times.

To indicate: press the combination switch

beyond the pressure point in the direction of

arrow ; or ?.

To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button or start the engine.

Turn the light switch to the L or Ã

position.

Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

In the Ã position, the high-beam head-

lamps are only switched on when it is dark and

the engine is running.

The K indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the high-beam head-

lamps are switched on.

To switch off the high-beam headlamps:

move the combination switch back to its nor-

mal position.

The K indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls

switching on/off of the high-beam headlamps

(Y page 98).

To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull

the combination switch in the direction of

arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

To switch on the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a

turn signal using the combination switch, only

the turn signal lamp on the corresponding

side of the vehicle will flash.

To switch off the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch

on if:

an air bag is deployed or

the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed

of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a

standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-

cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above

6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-

cation.

The hazard warning lamps still operate if the

ignition is switched off.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the headlamps

to change between low beam and high beam

automatically. The system recognizes vehicles

with their lights on, either approaching from the

opposite direction or traveling in front of your

vehicle, and consequently switches the head-

lamps from high beam to low beam.

The system automatically adapts the low-beam

headlamp range depending on the distance to

the other vehicle. Once the system no longer

detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the

high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behind

the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

WARNING

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize

road users:

who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians

who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists

whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier

Exterior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam

Assist may fail to recognize other road users

that have lights, or may recognize them too

late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-

matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-

tivated or will be activated regardless. There is

a risk of an accident.

Always carefully observe the traffic conditions

and switch off the high-beam headlamps in

good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are

responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting

to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-

ditions.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

restricted if there is:

poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow

dirt on the sensors or the sensors are

obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist

on/off

To switch on: turn the light switch to the

Ã position.

Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction

display lights up when it is dark and the light

sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above approx-

imately 16 mph (25 km/h):

The headlamp range is set automatically

depending on the distance between the vehi-

cle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approx-

imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road

users have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched on

automatically. The K indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approx-

imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users

have been detected or the roads are ade-

quately lit:

The high-beam headlamps are switched off

automatically. The K indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-

cator lamp in the multifunction display

remains lit.

To switch off: move the combination switch

back to its normal position or move the light

switch to another position.

The _ indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may

cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This

moisture does not affect the functionality of the

headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview

| Switches the automatic interior light-

ing control on or off

;

p Switches the right-hand reading lamp

on/off

c Activates/deactivates interior lighting

p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notes

In order to avoid the vehicle battery discharging,

the interior light functions are deactivated after

some time, except for when the Start/Stop but-

ton is in key position 2.

Interior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

Automatic interior lighting control

To switch on or off: press the | button.

When the automatic interior lighting control is

activated, the button is flush with the over-

head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if

you:

unlock the vehicle

open a door

switch off the engine with the Start/Stop but-

ton

The interior lighting is activated for a short time

when the engine is switched off with the Start/

Stop button. This delayed switch-off can be

adjusted via the multimedia system (see Digital

Operator's Manual).

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle

are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not

replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop which has the necessary

specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the

work required.

Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.

You must therefore make sure that these func-

tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp

setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers

on/off

Do not operate the windshield wipers when

the windshield is dry, as this could damage

the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-

lected on the windshield can scratch the glass

if wiping takes place when the windshield is

dry.

If it is necessary to switch on the windshield

wipers in dry weather conditions, always use

washer fluid when operating the windshield

wipers.

If the windshield wipers leave smears on the

windshield after the vehicle has been washed

in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-

dues may be the reason for this. Clean the

windshield using washer fluid after washing

the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to

optical influences and the windshield becom-

ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-

shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.

This could then damage the windshield wiper

blades or scratch the windshield.

For this reason, you should always switch off

the windshield wipers in dry weather.

$ Windshield wiper off

Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)

Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)

° Continuous wipe, slow

¯ Continuous wipe, fast

í Single wipe

î Wipes with washer fluid

Switch on the ignition.

Turn the combination switch to the corre-

sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate

wiping frequency is set automatically according

to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,

the rain sensor is more sensitive than in

the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper

to wipe more frequently.

The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is

responsible for ensuring unimpaired vision. Turn

the switch to a suitable position, depending on

the intensity of the precipitation, to ensure that

a good view of the traffic conditions is main-

tained.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will

no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent

you from observing the traffic conditions.

Worn or damaged wiper blades cause smearing.

This can cause the rain sensor to malfunction

100

Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the windshield wipers begin to move while

you are changing the wiper blades, you could

be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Never open the hood if a windshield wiper

arm has been folded away from the wind-

shield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a

wiper blade back onto the windshield.

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when

you change the wiper blade. If you release the

windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade

and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield

may be damaged by the force of the impact.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the

wiper.

Replacing the wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that they

are vertical

Switch off the engine.

Remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Set the windshield wiper to the ° position.

Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until

the windshield wiper starts.

When the wiper arms are in a vertical position

to the hood, press the Start/Stop button.

Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

Set the wiper blade at right angles to the

wiper arm.

Remove the wiper blade from the retainer on

the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer on

the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the

arrow.

Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm.

Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Windshield wipers

101

Lights and windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The windshield wipers

are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper

movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.

Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the

driver's door.

Remove the cause of the obstruction.

Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers

fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The windshield washer

fluid from the spray noz-

zles no longer hits the

center of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.

Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

The wiper arms are on

the windshield.

The wiper arms have been moved by an external force.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

The wiper arms move back down automatically.

102

Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notes

Observe the settings recommended on the fol-

lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog

up.

To prevent the windows from fogging up:

switch off climate control only briefly

switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly

switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion function

activate the "Windshield defrosting" function

briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and

air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior

filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior

climate.

The cooling with air dehumidification function is

only available when the engine is running. Opti-

mum climate control is only achieved with the

side windows closed.

Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during

warm weather, e.g. using the convenience

opening feature (Y page 78). This will speed

up the cooling process and the desired inte-

rior temperature will be reached more

quickly.

The integrated filter filters out most parti-

cles of dust and soot and completely filters

out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants

and odors. A clogged filter reduces the

amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.

Depending on the operating conditions and

environmental influences, the interval for

replacing the filter may be shorter than speci-

fied.

It is possible that the blower may be activa-

ted automatically 60 minutes after the engine

has been switched off depending on various

factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The

vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry

the climate control system.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Sets the temperature, left (Y page 105)

;

Sets the air distribution (Y page 105)

Sets the airflow (Y page 106)

Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 104)

Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 105)

Defrosts the windshield (Y page 106)

Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 213)

Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)

Overview of climate control systems

103

Climate control

Activates/deactivates synchronization (Y page 106)

Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 107)

Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 104)

Sets the temperature, right (Y page 105)

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic

climate control

Dual-zone automatic climate control

The following contains instructions and recom-

mendations to enable you to get the most out of

your dual-zone automatic climate control:

Activate climate control using the Ã

rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the

Ã rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling

with air dehumidification" function is not acti-

vated automatically in automatic mode. If

necessary, activate this function

(Y page 104).

Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function

briefly until the windshield is clear again.

Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if

there are unpleasant outside odors or when in

a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,

since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in

air-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate

control system only operates at a reduced capa-

city. If you require the full climate control output,

you can switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button (Y page 114).

Operating the climate control sys-

tems

Setting climate control

General notes

When the climate control is switched off, the air

supply and air circulation are also switched off.

The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off

climate control only briefly

Switch on climate control primarily using the

Ã rocker switch (Y page 105).

Activating/deactivating

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or

higher using the H rocker switch.

To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using

the H rocker switch.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-

fication on/off

General notes

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-

ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will

not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also

not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up

more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling

with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

is only available when the engine is running. The

air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified

according to the temperature selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is

normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-

tion.

Activating/deactivating

Press the ¿ rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker

switch lights up or goes out.

104

Operating the climate control systems

Climate control

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The indicator lamp over

the ¿ rocker switch

flashes three times or

remains off. The cooling

with air dehumidification

function cannot be acti-

vated via the multimedia

system any longer

(Y page 213).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-

function.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes

In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-

tained automatically at a constant level. The

system automatically regulates the temperature

of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-

tribution.

During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with

air dehumidification" function is activated.

Automatic control

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To activate: press rocker switch Ã up or

down.

The indicator lamp above the Ã rocker

switch lights up.

Set the desired temperature using the w

rocker switch.

To switch to manual operation: press the

H rocker switch up or down.

Press the upper or lower section of the _

rocker switch.

The indicator lamp above the Ã rocker

switch goes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or

air distribution manually, the indicator lamp

above the Ã rocker switch goes out. The

function which has not been changed manually,

however, continues to be controlled automati-

cally. When the manually set function switches

back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp

above the Ã rocker switch lights up again.

Setting the temperature

Different temperatures can be set for the driv-

er's and front-passenger sides.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To increase or reduce: press the w

rocker switch up or down.

Only change the temperature setting in small

increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings

Directs air through the defroster vents

Directs air through the center and side air

vents

Directs air through the footwell air vents

Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents

Directs air through the defroster, center,

side and footwell vents

Directs air through the defroster, center

and side air vents

Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

Setting

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

Press the _ rocker switch up or down.

The various air distribution settings appear in

the multimedia system.

Operating the climate control systems

105

Climate control

Setting the airflow

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To increase or reduce: press the H

rocker switch up or down.

Activating/deactivating synchroniza-

tion

General notes

Climate control can be set centrally using the

synchronization function. The temperature set-

ting is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Activating/deactivating

Press the 0 rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the 0 rocker

switch lights up or goes out.

The synchronization function deactivates if the

settings for the front-passenger side are

changed.

Defrosting the windshield

General notes

You can use this function to defrost the wind-

shield or to clear a fogged up windshield and

side windows.

Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function

as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Activating/deactivating

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To switch on: press the ¬ rocker switch

up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker

switch lights up. The current climate control

settings are deactivated.

The climate control system switches to the

following functions:

high airflow

high temperature

air distribution to the windshield and front

side windows

air-recirculation mode off

If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-

ification" function is activated. In this case,

the indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker

switch remains switched off.

To switch off: press the ¬ rocker switch

up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker

switch goes out. The previously selected set-

tings are restored. Air-recirculation mode

remains deactivated.

Removing condensation from the win-

dows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion" function with the ¿ rocker switch.

Switch on automatic mode using the Ã

rocker switch.

If the windows continue to fog up, activate the

"Windshield defrosting" function using the

¬ rocker switch.

You should only select this setting until the

windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside

Activate the windshield wipers.

Switch on automatic mode using the Ã

rocker switch.

If you clean the windows regularly, they do

not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notes

The rear window defroster has a high current

draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon

as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear

window defroster switches off automatically

after several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window

defroster may switch off.

106

Operating the climate control systems

Climate control

Activating/deactivating

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker

switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The rear window

defroster has deactiva-

ted prematurely or can-

not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.

Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,

interior lighting or the seat heating.

When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster

can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off

General notes

You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of

fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-

ing the vehicle from outside. The air already

inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-

dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at

low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation

mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-

ging up.

Activating/deactivating

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To activate: press the g rocker switch up

or down.

The indicator lamp above the g rocker

switch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-

cally:

at high outside temperatures

in a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system

only)

The indicator lamp above the g rocker

switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation

mode is activated. Outside air is added after

about 30 minutes.

To deactivate: press the g rocker switch

up or down.

The indicator lamp above the g rocker

switch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-

cally:

after approximately five minutes at outside

temperatures below approximately 41 ‡

(5 †)

after approximately five minutes if cooling

with air dehumidification is deactivated

after approximately 30 minutes at outside

temperatures above approximately 41 ‡

(5 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification"

function is activated

Air vents

Important safety notes

WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air

vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in

the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There

is a risk of injury.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always

maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to

another area of the vehicle interior.

Air vents

107

Climate control

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,

please observe the following notes:

keep the air inlet between the windshield and

the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow

or leaves.

never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in

the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents

Side air vent (example)

Side window defroster vent

;

Side air vent, left

Control for left side air vent

To open or close: turn thumbwheel = to the

left or right as far as it will go.

To adjust the air direction: hold side air

vent ; in the center and move it up or down

or to the left or right.

Adjusting the blower setting of the

AIRSCARF vents

WARNING

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air

can flow from the vents in the head restraints.

This could result in burns in the immediate

vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Reduce the heater output before it becomes

too hot.

The blower setting of AIRSCARF vent : can be

adjusted using the AIRSCARF button

(Y page 89).

108

Air vents

Climate control

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes

The sensor system of some driving and driving

safety systems adjusts automatically while a

certain distance is being driven after the vehicle

has been delivered or after repairs. Full system

effectiveness is not reached until the end of this

teach-in procedure.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after several

hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for

this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it is

new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-

formance in the future.

You should therefore drive at varying vehicle

and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles

(1,500 km).

Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),

drive in program C.

Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)

for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).

Only briefly allow the engine to reach a max-

imum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.

Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,

during this period.

Do not exceed Ô of the maximum permitted

engine speed for each gear.

Shift up into manual mode M and temporary

manual drive program in good time.

Do not carry out a RACE START.

Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake

the vehicle.

Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal

beyond the pressure point (kickdown).

After 1,000 miles(1,500 km), you can increase

the engine speed gradually and accelerate the

vehicle to full speed.

You should also observe these notes on break-

ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on

your vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the respective maximum per-

missible speed.

Driving

Important safety notes

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is

jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.

WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage

of the pedals, e.g.:

shoes with thick soles

shoes with high heels

slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct

usage of the pedals.

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully

released when driving, the parking brake can:

overheat and cause a fire

lose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release

the parking brake fully before driving off.

Driving

109

Driving and parking

Do not warm up the engine while stationary.

Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine

speeds and full throttle until the engine has

reached its operating temperature.

In vehicles with automatic transmission,

engage positions P and R only when the vehi-

cle is stationary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive

wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.

You could otherwise damage the drive train.

During a cold start with low engine oil tem-

peratures (below 32 ‡) (0 †), the maximum

engine speed is restricted in order to protect

the engine. To protect the engine and main-

tain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at

full throttle when the engine is cold.

Key positions

Start/Stop button

General notes

All vehicles are equipped with a Start/Stop but-

ton.

The Start/Stop button is located in the center

console and is illuminated when the vehicle is

unlocked.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in

succession corresponds to the different Smart-

Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the

case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-

ately.

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the Smart-

Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when

starting the engine.

If there is a SmartKey in the ignition lock, this

takes precedence over the KEYLESS-GO start

function.

To start the vehicle without actively using the

SmartKey:

the SmartKey must be in the vehicle

the vehicle must not be locked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 67)

Do not keep the SmartKey:

with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another SmartKey

with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil

inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote

control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:

you will not be able to switch on the ignition

with the Start/Stop button

you will no longer be able to start the engine

with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is

unlocked again

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button

on the driver's door (Y page 72), you can con-

tinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop

button.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicle

is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/

Stop button for three seconds. This function

operates independently of the ECO start/stop

automatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light

up. Further information on situations where an

indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting

the engine or lights up while driving

(Y page 200).

If Start/Stop button : has not yet been

pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey

being removed from the ignition.

To switch on the power supply: press

Start/Stop button : once.

The power supply is switched on. You can now

activate the windshield wipers, for example. If

you press Start/Stop button : twice in this

110

Driving

Driving and parking

key position, the power supply is switched off

again.

To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop

button : twice.

The ignition is switched on.

If you press Start/Stop button : once when

in this position, the ignition is deactivated

again.

Start/Stop button USA

;

Start/Stop button Canada

SmartKey

You can also start the vehicle with the SmartKey

in the ignition lock.

The ignition lock is located in the rear stowage

space of the center console.

To remove the SmartKey

Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers

Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position

To start the engine

The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition

lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for

the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.

The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

open the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

get out and disrupt traffic.

operate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

release the parking brake.

shifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

Start the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

DANGER

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases is hazardous to health

and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of

fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine

running an enclosed space without adequate

ventilation.

WARNING

Flammable materials introduced through

environmental influence or by animals can

ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or

parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk

of fire.

Carry out regular checks to make sure that

there are no flammable foreign materials in

the engine compartment or in the exhaust

system.

Driving

111

Driving and parking

General notes

The catalytic converter is preheated for up to

30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the

engine may change during this time.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sport

transmission

Shift the transmission to position j

(Y page 117).

The transmission position indicator on the

multifunction display shows j

(Y page 119).

You can start the engine in transmission posi-

tion j and i.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop

button

The Start/Stop button can be used to start the

vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey

into the ignition lock. You merely need to carry

the SmartKey on your person. This mode for

starting the engine operates independently of

the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-

tion.

You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always

take the SmartKey with you when leaving the

vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.

Pay attention to the important safety notes.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Press the Start/Stop button once

(Y page 110).

The engine starts.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 111) and release it as soon

as the engine is running.

If the engine will not start:

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock

after a short waiting period.

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 111).

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

light up (Y page 199).

Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 111) and release it as soon

as the engine is running.

Pulling away

General notes

WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position 7

or C, the vehicle could pull away suddenly.

There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position 7 or

C, always firmly depress the brake pedal

and do not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling

away.

The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled

away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at any

time.

You can also deactivate the automatic locking

feature (Y page 73).

It is only possible to shift the transmission from

position j to the desired position if:

the engine is running and

you depress the brake pedal

If you do not depress the brake pedal, the E-

SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking

lock remains engaged.

Information on the automatic release of the

electric parking brake (Y page 130).

Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away

forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It

holds the vehicle for a short time after you have

removed your foot from the brake pedal. This

gives you enough time to move your foot from

the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to

depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

112

Driving

Driving and parking

WARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-

ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from the

brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start

assist.

Hill start assist is not active if:

you are pulling away on a level road or on a

downhill gradient

the transmission is in position i

the electric parking brake is applied

ESP

is malfunctioning

Rear axle steering

General notes

Depending on the speed, rear axle steering

adapts the track of the rear axle to the position

of the front wheels. Together with the steering

angle of the front wheels, this results in greater

mobility and stability than on vehicles without

rear axle steering.

Rear axle steering has the following character-

istics:

reduced steering effort and turning circle,

resulting in reduced parking effort.

improved driving stability, e.g. on curves.

the vehicle has more direct steering. Control

of the vehicle is thereby increased.

ECO start/stop function

Introduction

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped

under certain conditions.

The engine starts automatically when the driver

wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop

function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel

consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and

you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

the ignition and secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

General notes

ECO start/stop display

If the engine has been switched off automati-

cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è

ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-

play.

The ECO start/stop function is only available in

drive program C.

The ECO start/stop function is activated when-

ever you switch on the engine using the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button. This is the case if:

the ignition was switched off for more than

four hours or

the ECO start/stop function had been activa-

ted before the engine was switched off

Automatic engine switch-off

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically if:

the ECO start/stop function is activated

(Y page 114) and

you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-

mission position h

The ECO start/stop function is operational

when:

the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green

the outside temperature and the atmospheric

air pressure is within the range that is suitable

for the system

Driving

113

Driving and parking

the engine and the transmission are at a suf-

ficient temperature for the ECO start/stop

function

the set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached

the battery is sufficiently charged

the system detects that the windshield is not

fogged up when the air-conditioning system is

switched on

the hood is closed

the driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when

the engine is stopped automatically.

The HOLD function can also be activated if the

engine has been switched off automatically. It is

then not necessary to continue applying the

brakes during the automatic stop phase. When

you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine

starts automatically and the braking effect of

the HOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:

you switch off the ECO start/stop function by

pressing the ECO button

switch to drive program RACE, S+ or S

(Y page 116)

you switch to manual mode M (Y page 121)

in transmission position h, the brake pedal

is released and the HOLD function is not

active

you depress the accelerator pedal

you engage reverse gear k

you move the transmission out of position j

you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-

er's door

the vehicle starts to roll

the brake system requires this

the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-

ates from the set range

the system detects moisture on the wind-

shield when the air-conditioning system is

switched on

the battery's condition of charge is too low

Shifting the transmission to position j does

not start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECO

start/stop function

To deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.

To activate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up.

If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop

function has been deactivated manually or as

the result of a malfunction. The engine will then

not be switched off automatically when the vehi-

cle stops.

The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:

switch to drive program RACE, S+ or S

(Y page 116)

you switch to manual mode M (Y page 121)

AMG sports exhaust system

You can choose between different AMG sports

exhaust system volumes using the position of

the exhaust flap.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-

ting is activated.

114

Driving

Driving and parking

Setting the volume:

Press button :.

If you select the loudest setting, indicator

lamp ; lights up.

You can also adjust the position of the exhaust

flap using the:

DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 116)

Multimedia system

Problems with the engine

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine does not

start.

The HOLD function or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 145) or Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 142).

Try to start the engine again (Y page 111).

The engine does not

start. The starter motor

can be heard.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

Before attempting to start the engine again:

Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in

the instrument cluster go out.

Turn the SmartKey back to SmartKey position u in the ignition

lock.

Try to start the engine again (Y page 111). Avoid excessively long

and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the

battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not

start. You cannot hear

the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or

discharged.

Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 256).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.

Try to start the engine again (Y page 111).

If the engine still does not start:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving

115

Driving and parking

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine is not running

smoothly and is misfir-

ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

component of the engine management system.

Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter

and damage it.

Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The coolant temperature

display shows a value

above 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no

longer being cooled sufficiently.

Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to

cool down.

Check the coolant level (Y page 239). Observe the warning notes

as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

General information

Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC

SELECT controller.

Available drive programs:

C Comfort Comfort-oriented, optimum-

economy engine and trans-

mission settings

S Sport Sporty engine and transmis-

sion settings

S+ Sport Plus Especially sporty engine and

transmission settings

RACE

(AMG GT C

Roadster)

Maximum sportiness and

engine and transmission

settings suitable for the

racetrack

I Individual Individual settings

In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-

gram C is recommended.

Depending on the drive program selected the

following vehicle characteristics will change:

the drive (engine management)

the transmission management

ESP

(Y page 62)

the suspension (Y page 147)

the position of the exhaust flap

(Y page 114)

the availability of the ECO start/stop function

(Y page 113)

the availability of gliding mode

(Y page 120)

Further information for automatic drive program

characteristics (Y page 122).

Additionally, in drive program I you can config-

ure the respective vehicle characteristics using

the multimedia system. You can find informa-

tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Y page 111).

Selecting the drive program

Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : until the

desired drive program is selected.

The selected drive program appears in the

multifunction display. After five seconds the

116

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

Driving and parking

display goes out and the symbol of the selec-

ted drive program appears.

The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC

SELECT controller : lights up in red.

In addition, the current drive program settings

are displayed in the multimedia system dis-

play.

Additional settings

Manual mode (Y page 123)

;

ECO start/stop function (Y page 113)

Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 114)

Suspension (Y page 147)

ESP

(Y page 62)

When you press buttons : - A the corre-

sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC

SELECT controller setting is overwritten.

These settings will also be maintained for man-

ual mode and ESP

if you switch to drive pro-

gram RACE (AMG GT C Roadster), S+, S or C

using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller.

If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-

acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case

if you have previously pressed one of buttons :

- A. If you then change the drive program using

the DYNAMIC SELECT controller, the standard

setting for the drive program is selected.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports

transmission

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position 7

or C, the vehicle could pull away sud-

denly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position 7 or

C, always firmly depress the brake pedal

and do not simultaneously accelerate.

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neu-

tral position N when you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parking

brake.

E-SELECT selector lever

General notes

If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle

is in motion, do not shift the automatic trans-

mission directly from h to k, from k to h

or directly to j.

Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-

cle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission

position h or k, otherwise park position j

is engaged automatically.

The transmission could be damaged.

If you want to engage a transmission posi-

tion or to exit park position j, the engine

must be running.

The E-SELECT lever always returns to its original

position.

The current transmission position j, k, i or

h is shown in the transmission position display

in the multifunction display.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

117

Driving and parking

Overview of transmission positions

Park position with parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral

Drive

Engaging park position P

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Press button : on the center console.

If you depress the brake pedal and push the

E‑SELECT lever forwards or pull it backwards to

the first point of resistance, park position j is

disengaged. The transmission shifts to neutral

Engaging park position P automatically

Park position j is engaged automatically in the

following circumstances:

if you switch off the engine using the Start/

Stop button and open the driver's or front-

passenger door.

if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.

if you open the driver's door while traveling at

low speeds in transmission position h or k.

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-

mission will shift automatically to transmission

position j if the HOLD function or Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Observe

the information on the HOLD function

(Y page 144) and on Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC (Y page 140).

Engaging reverse gear R

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Push the E-SELECT lever forwards past the

first point of resistance.

The transmission position k is engaged.

If you engage reverse gear, the engine starts

automatically (Y page 114).

Shifting to neutral N

Start the engine (Y page 112).

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Push the E-SELECT lever forwards or pull it

back to the first point of resistance, depend-

ing on the current transmission position.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to i before

switching off the engine, the transmission

remains in i for approximately 30 minutes. If

you open the driver's or front-passenger door

during this period, the transmission automati-

cally shifts to park position j.

If you want the automatic transmission to

remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-

cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a

towing system:

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Switch on the ignition.

118

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Shift to neutral i.

Release the brake pedal.

Release the electric parking brake.

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 and leave it

in the ignition lock.

You can find further information under "Car

wash" (Y page 242).

Shifting to transmission position D

Start the engine (Y page 112).

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

Push the E-SELECT lever back past the first

point of resistance.

The automatic transmission shifts to h.

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the

transmission in position h, the ECO start/stop

function switches off the engine automatically

(Y page 113).

Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display

The current transmission position and drive pro-

gram appear in the multifunction display.

Drive program

;

Transmission position

Additionally, displays next to the E‑SELECT lever

show the current transmission position.

The displays light up if you:

switch on the power supply with the Start/

Stop button (Y page 110) or

insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock

(Y page 111).

The displays go out if you:

switch off the power supply with the Start/

Stop button (Y page 110) or

remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

(Y page 111).

If the transmission position display in the mul-

tifunction display is not working, check on the

display next to the E-SELECT lever whether the

desired transmission position is engaged.

Transmission positions

Park position

This prevents the vehicle from rolling

away when stopped.

Only shift the transmission into posi-

tion j (Y page 117) when the vehi-

cle is stationary. The parking lock

should not be used as a brake when

parking. Always apply the electronic

parking brake in addition to the park-

ing lock in order to secure the vehi-

cle.

The automatic transmission shifts to

j automatically if you:

remove the SmartKey

switch off the engine when in k or

h and open the driver's door or

front-passenger door

open the driver's door while trav-

eling at low speeds in transmission

position h or k

In the event of a malfunction of the

vehicle's electronics, the transmis-

sion may lock in position j. Have

the vehicle electronics checked

immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Reverse gear

Only shift the transmission into posi-

tion k when the vehicle is station-

ary.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

119

Driving and parking

Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to i

while driving. The automatic trans-

mission could otherwise be dam-

aged.

No power is transmitted from the

engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you to

move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push

it or tow it.

If ESP

is deactivated or faulty: shift

the transmission to position i if the

vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.

on icy roads.

If you switch off the engine using the

SmartKey or the Start/Stop button,

the automatic transmission shifts to

neutral i automatically.

Coasting in neutral i may

cause damage to the drive train.

Drive

The automatic transmission changes

gear automatically in the automatic

drive programs (Y page 122). All

forward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts through the

individual gears automatically when it is in trans-

mission position h. This automatic gear shift-

ing behavior is determined by:

the selected drive program (Y page 116)

the position of the accelerator pedal

the road speed

Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-

matic transmission shifts gear:

little throttle: early upshifts

more throttle: late upshifts

A dynamic driving style with high longitudinal

and lateral acceleration delays the shift points

to higher engine speeds.

Double-clutch function

When shifting down, the double-clutch function

is active regardless of the currently selected

drive program. The double-clutch function

reduces load change reactions and is conducive

to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by

the double-clutch function depends on the drive

program selected.

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:

In the automatic drive programs, depress the

accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.

Depending on the engine speed and the selec-

ted drive program, the automatic transmis-

sion shifts to the lowest gear permissible to

give optimal acceleration.

Ease off the accelerator pedal once the

desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Kickdown is not available in manual mode M.

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free may help to free the

vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow.

To do so, shift back and forth repeatedly

between transmission positions h and k.

The vehicle's transmission management

restricts shifting between transmission posi-

tions h and k to speeds up to a maximum of

5 mph (9 km/h).

To shift back and forth between transmission

positions h and k, move the E-SELECT lever

up and down beyond the pressure point.

Gliding mode

120

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

Gliding mode is characterized by the following:

the combustion engine is disconnected from

the drive train.

the engine speed corresponds to the idling

speed.

the C symbol disappears from the multifunc-

tion display and symbol : is displayed

(Y page 119).

In drive program C, you can deactivate and acti-

vate gliding mode using the ECO button

(Y page 114).

Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-

ing conditions:

the speed is within a suitable range.

the course of the road is suitable, e.g. there

are no steep up or downhill gradients.

you are no longer depressing the accelerator

pedal.

Gliding mode is deactivated under the following

conditions:

you depress the accelerator pedal.

you depress the brake pedal.

you switch the transmission position using

the E‑SELECT lever (Y page 117).

you switch to drive program RACE

(AMG GT C Roadster), S+ or S (Y page 116).

you switch to manual mode M (Y page 121).

you leave the suitable speed range.

If you have selected the "Comfort" setting

for the drive (engine management) in drive

program I, you can also activate gliding mode.

You can find information about this in the Dig-

ital Operator's Manual.

M button

Press M button :.

Indicator lamp ; lights up. The letter M

appears in the multifunction display. Manual

mode M is activated.

M Manual Permanent manual gear-

shifting

Further information on manual mode M

(Y page 123).

In addition to manual mode M, you can also

activate temporary manual drive program

(Y page 122).

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Y page 111).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

Using steering wheel paddle shifters : and ;

you can:

activate the temporary manual drive program

and change gear yourself in automatic drive

programs (Y page 122)

change gear yourself in manual mode M

(Y page 123)

activate RACE START (Y page 146)

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

121

Driving and parking

Automatic drive program

Drive program C (Comfort)

Drive program C is characterized by the follow-

ing:

the vehicle delivers comfortable, economical

handling characteristics.

the vehicle pulls away more gently in forward

and reverse gears, unless the accelerator

pedal is depressed fully.

the vehicle has improved driving stability, for

example on slippery road surfaces.

optimal fuel consumption resulting from the

automatic transmission shifting up sooner.

The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed

range and the wheels are less likely to spin.

gliding mode is available.

the ECO start/stop function is available.

Drive program S (Sport)

Drive program S is characterized by the follow-

ing:

the vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-

istics.

the automatic transmission shifts up later.

The fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatic transmission

shift points.

the suspension exhibits stiff springing and

damping settings.

gliding mode is not available.

the ECO start/stop function is not available.

if a period of dynamic driving is followed by an

extended phase with a constant accelerator

pedal position, the vehicle shifts up to a

higher gear. This optimizes fuel consumption.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)

Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-

lowing:

the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving

characteristics.

the automatic transmission shifts up later.

The fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatic transmission

shift points.

the suspension exhibits particularly hard

springing and damping settings.

gliding mode is not available.

the ECO start/stop function is not available.

if a period of dynamic driving is followed by an

extended phase with a constant accelerator

pedal position, the vehicle shifts up to a

higher gear. This optimizes fuel consumption.

Drive program I (Individual)

In drive program I the following properties of the

drive program can be selected:

the drive (engine management)

the transmission management

ESP

(Y page 62)

the suspension (Y page 147)

the position of the exhaust flap

(Y page 114)

Information about configuring drive program I

with the multimedia system can be found in the

Digital Operator's Manual.

Temporary manual drive program

General notes

In this drive program, you can briefly change

gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle

shifters. The transmission must be in position

h to do this.

You can activate the temporary manual drive

program in the automatic drive program. The

switching times correspond to the previously

active automatic drive program.

In addition to temporary manual drive program

you can also activate manual mode M

(Y page 123).

Activating

Shift the transmission to position h.

Pull the left-hand or right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter (Y page 121).

Temporary manual drive program is activated.

The last active drive program : and selected

gear ; appear in the multifunction display.

122

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

Shifting gears

If you pull on the left-hand or right-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmis-

sion switches to temporary manual drive pro-

gram for a limited amount of time. Depending on

which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled,

the automatic transmission immediately shifts

into the next gear down or up, if permitted.

To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter (Y page 121).

The automatic transmission shifts up to the

next gear.

If the maximum engine speed in the currently

engaged gear is reached and you continue to

accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-

matically shifts up in order to prevent engine

damage.

The automatic transmission will not shift up to

the next gear when the engine speed is very

low.

To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter (Y page 121).

The automatic transmission shifts down to

the next gear.

If the engine were to exceed the maximum

engine speed when shifting down, the auto-

matic transmission protects against engine

damage by not shifting down.

Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-

ing.

When using kickdown, the automatic trans-

mission automatically shifts to a lower gear.

Deactivating

If you have activated temporary manual drive

program, it will remain active for a certain

amount of time. Under certain conditions, the

minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the

case of lateral acceleration, during overrun

mode or when driving on steep terrain.

When temporary manual drive program is deac-

tivated, the automatic transmission shifts into

the automatic drive program that was last selec-

ted.

You can also deactivate temporary manual drive

program yourself:

Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter and hold it in place (Y page 121).

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to

change the drive program (Y page 116).

Temporary manual drive program is deactiva-

ted. The automatic transmission switches

into the automatic drive program that was last

selected.

Manual mode

General notes

In manual mode M, you can permanently change

gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle

shifters. The transmission must be in position

h to do this.

The switching times correspond to the previ-

ously active automatic drive program.

The transmission only shifts down automatically

at low engine speeds depending on the respec-

tive gear.

In addition to manual mode M, you can also

activate temporary manual drive program

(Y page 122).

Activating

In manual mode M, you can change gear your-

self using the steering wheel paddle shifters if

the transmission is in position h. You can see

the currently selected drive program and which

gear is engaged in the multifunction display.

Press the M button (Y page 121).

M is shown in the multifunction display and

the indicator lamp on the M button lights up.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in

adopting an economical driving style. The rec-

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

123

Driving and parking

ommended gear is shown in the multifunction

display.

When the corresponding gearshift recom-

mendation : appears in the multifunction

display of the instrument cluster, shift to rec-

ommended gear ;.

Display for shift override

If the engine speed becomes too high or too low

as a result of shifting gear, you cannot shift gear

using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you

then pull the left-hand or right-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter, segments : light up red

briefly.

Downshifting

Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 121).

In cases where it is permissible, the automatic

transmission shifts down to the next gear.

Maximum acceleration: pull the left-hand

steering wheel paddle shifter until the trans-

mission selects the optimum gear for the cur-

rent speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down,

the automatic transmission automatically shifts

down.

Deactivating

Press the M button (Y page 121).

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

RACE drive program (AMG GT C Road-

ster)

The RACE drive program is designed for maxi-

mum performance in terms of shift points and

engine speeds. The engine and transmission

should be at normal operating temperature for

the RACE drive program (Y page 170). Use the

RACE drive program on a closed-off race circuit.

The RACE drive program is characterized by the

following:

the vehicle exhibits driving characteristics

suitable for the racetrack.

all vehicle systems are set for maximum

sportiness.

for optimum performance, the transmission

shifts up later and shifts down sooner.

the multifunction display shows the manual

gearshift program without upshift indicator

(Y page 122).

the gearshift recommendation gives you

information for slowly warming up the drive

assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient

driving style (Y page 123). You can follow the

gearshift recommendations at all times and

shift gear accordingly using the steering

wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the

gearshift recommendation, using the steering

wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize the

drive train and engine operating mode at any

time.

if you have selected a gear manually, this will

be maintained until the vehicle speed increa-

ses or decreases dramatically.

if you do not follow the gearshift recommen-

dations, the automatic shift points may result

in high fuel consumption.

the suspension exhibits particularly hard

springing and damping settings.

the transmission shift and response times are

significantly shorter with more aggressive

gear changes. This is particularly the case

when shifting up. The shift strategy is thus

designed to interact dynamically with the

high-revving engine.

gliding mode is not available.

the ECO start/stop function is not available.

124

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

Problems with the transmission

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The transmission has

problems shifting gear.

There is a malfunction in the transmission.

The transmission no longer shifts into the next gear.

Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

The acceleration ability

is deteriorating.

The transmission no lon-

ger shifts into all of the

gears.

A sub-transmission has failed.

The smoothness of the gear change is restricted.

Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and

explosion by improper handling of fuel.

You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking

and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition

before refueling and, if present, switch off the

auxiliary heating.

WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

Wash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-

out delay.

If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-

ing.

Immediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING

Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and

thereby ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of

fire and explosion.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold

of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle

body. This discharges any electrostatic

charge that may have built up.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the

refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic

charge could build up again.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-

eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge

could build up again.

Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition

if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could

result in damage to the fuel system and the

engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop

and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

completely.

Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the

fuel system.

Take care not to spill any fuel on painted

surfaces. You could otherwise damage the

paintwork.

Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.

The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system

could otherwise be blocked by particles from

the fuel can.

Refueling

125

Driving and parking

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out

when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality

(Y page 289).

Refueling

General information

Pay attention to the important safety notes

(Y page 125).

If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,

the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed

8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next

to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-

cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

To open the fuel filler flap

;

To insert the fuel filler cap

Tire pressure table

Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled

Switch off the engine.

Open the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in key posi-

tion u. This is the same as the SmartKey

having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition

lock:

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow :.

The fuel filler flap swings up.

Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and

remove it.

Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the

inside of fuel filler flap ;.

Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel

pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and

refuel.

Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops

filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak

out.

Closing the fuel filler flap

Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.

Close the fuel filler flap.

Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-

cle.

If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the

8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display

(Y page 189).

126

Refueling

Driving and parking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the

vehicle.

WARNING

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

Risk of explosion or fire.

Apply the electric parking brake.

Switch off the engine.

Open the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in key position u. This is the same

as the SmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot

be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

Unlock the vehicle (Y page 66).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 68).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

WARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust

gas flow. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-

rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-

cle which are hot. Take particular care not to

park on dry grassland or harvested grain

fields.

WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

release the parking brake.

shift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

start the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle

is in motion, do not shift the automatic trans-

mission directly from h to k, from k to h

or directly to j.

Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-

cle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission

Parking

127

Driving and parking

position h or k, otherwise park position j

is engaged automatically.

The transmission could be damaged.

Always secure the vehicle correctly against

rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-

etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:

the electric parking brake must be applied.

the transmission must be in position j.

the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-

tion lock or the Start/Stop button must be

pressed.

the front wheels must be turned towards the

curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

the empty vehicle must be secured at the

front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for

example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

a laden vehicle must also be secured at the

rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for

example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neu-

tral position N when you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parking

brake.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sport

transmission

Do not remove the SmartKey while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Otherwise, at low speeds,

parking lock j will be activated automati-

cally.

Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-

cle is in motion. At low speeds, transmission

position j is engaged automatically.

This could cause damage to the transmission

and the parking lock.

Apply the electric parking brake.

Shift the transmission to j using the button

on the center console.

Using the Start/Stop button

Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 110)

The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in

the instrument cluster go out.

If the driver's door is closed, this is the same

as key position 1. If the driver's door is open,

this is the same as key position u, i.e. the

SmartKey having been removed.

If you switch the engine off with the trans-

mission in position k or h, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts to i.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to i before

switching off the engine, the transmission

remains in i for 30 minutes.

If you open the driver's or front-passenger

door during this period, the transmission

automatically shifts to j and the electric

parking brake is automatically applied.

The engine can be switched off in an emer-

gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-

ing and holding the Start/Stop button for

three seconds. This function operates inde-

pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic

engine switch-off function.

Using the SmartKey

Turn the SmartKey to key position u in the

ignition lock and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to i before

switching off the engine, the transmission

remains in i for approximately 30 minutes.

If you open the driver's or front-passenger

door during this time, the transmission shifts

automatically to j.

The transmission remains in i if:

the SmartKey is in the ignition lock and

you use the E‑SELECT lever to shift the

transmission to i before switching the

engine off

This still applies if you open the driver's or

front-passenger door.

Further information on transmission position

i when operating with a SmartKey is avail-

able under "Automatic car wash"

(Y page 242).

128

Parking

Driving and parking

Electric parking brake

General notes

WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

release the parking brake.

shift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

start the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is

dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-

board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in

the system, it may not be possible to apply the

released parking brake.

If this is the case, only park the vehicle on

level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling

away.

Shift the automatic transmission to position

It may not be possible to release an applied

parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or

there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a

qualified specialist workshop.

The electric parking brake performs a function

test at regular intervals while the engine is

switched off. The sounds that can be heard while

this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

To apply: push handle :.

When the electric parking brake is applied,

the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada

only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-

ment cluster.

The electric parking brake can also be applied

when the SmartKey is in position u.

To release: pull handle :.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

goes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released:

if the ignition is switched on using the Start/

Stop button or

the SmartKey is in SmartKey position 1 or

2 in the ignition lock (Y page 111)

Applying automatically

The electric parking brake is automatically

applied when the transmission is in position j

and:

the engine is switched off or

the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the

driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being

automatically applied, pull handle :.

The electric parking brake is also applied auto-

matically in the following cases if:

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brings the

vehicle to a standstill or

the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-

tionary

Parking

129

Driving and parking

In addition, at least one of the following condi-

tions must be fulfilled:

there is a system malfunction

the power supply is insufficient

the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only)

indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights

up.

The electric parking brake is not automatically

applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO

start/stop function.

Releasing automatically

The electric parking brake is released when the

following conditions are fulfilled:

The engine is running

The seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt

buckle

the transmission is in position h or k and

you depress the accelerator pedal or shift

from position j to h or k

if the transmission is in position k, the trunk

lid must be closed

If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat

belt buckle, the following conditions must be

fulfilled:

the driver's door and front-passenger door

are closed

you move the transmission out of position j

or you have previously driven at a speed

above 2 mph (3 km/h)

if the transmission is in position k, the trunk

lid must be closed

When the electric parking brake is released, the

red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indi-

cator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster.

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-

gency by using the electric parking brake.

While driving, push handle : of the electric

parking brake (Y page 129).

The vehicle is braked as long as you keep

handle : of the electric parking brake

pressed. The longer electric parking brake

handle : is depressed, the greater the brak-

ing force.

During braking:

a warning tone sounds

the Please Release Parking BrakePlease Release Parking Brake mes-

sage appears

the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-

still, the electric parking brake is applied.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

General notes

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than

four weeks, the battery may be damaged by

exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six

weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a

result of lack of use.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek

advice.

Trickle charging the on-board electrical

system battery

The battery may drain if the vehicle is left sta-

tionary for long periods. In this case, Mercedes-

Benz recommends attaching the trickle charger

to 12 V socket : in the trunk.

A trickle charger and further information

can be obtained from a qualified specialist

workshop.

Switch the ignition off.

Open the trunk lid.

130

Parking

Driving and parking

Connect the cable provided in the trunk to the

trickle charger.

Connect the trickle charger to 12 V socket :.

Consult the manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions on how to do so.

The trunk lid can be closed, even if a trickle

charger is connected. Make sure that the con-

nector for both the connector cables is outside

of the vehicle.

The connector can then separate if the vehicle is

moved, even if you forget to disconnect the con-

nector cables. This prevents damaging the

cables and the trickle charger.

A trickle charger connected to 12 V socket :

only maintains the current charge level of the

vehicle's electrical system battery. If the vehi-

cle's electrical system battery is discharged, it

needs to be charged with a battery charger.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

WARNING

If you operate mobile communication equip-

ment when driving, you may be distracted

from the traffic situation. You could also lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Only operate this equipment when the vehicle

is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country

in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-

hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while

driving a vehicle.

If you make a call while driving, always use

hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone

when the traffic situation permits. If you are

unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop

before operating the telephone.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a

distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-

ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuel

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

The tires should always be inflated to the rec-

ommended tire pressure.

Remove unnecessary loads.

Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.

Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.

Have all service and maintenance work car-

ried out at the specified intervals.

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in

cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-

rain.

Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and

driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can

affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-

ment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-

dent is greatly increased when you drink or

take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow

anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-

ing drugs.

Emission control

DANGER

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases is hazardous to health

and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of

fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine

Driving tips

131

Driving and parking

running an enclosed space without adequate

ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep

the level of poisonous components in exhaust

fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if

they are serviced exactly in accordance with the

manufacturer's specifications. Always have

work on the engine carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work

relevant to safety or on safety-related systems

must be carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The engine settings must not be changed under

any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific

service work must be carried out at regular

intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-

Benz service requirements.

You can obtain current information concerning

the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a

qualified specialist workshop. This could be an

overview of the maintenance work or any addi-

tional maintenance work, for example.

Braking

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a

lower gear in good time. This allows you to

take advantage of the engine's braking effect.

This helps you to avoid overheating the

brakes and wearing them out excessively.

When you take advantage of engine braking, a

drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.

on a slippery road surface. This could cause

damage to the drive train. This type of damage

is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-

ranty.

Heavy and light loads

WARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, the braking system can overheat. This

increases the stopping distance and can even

cause the braking system to fail. There is a

risk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never

depress the brake pedal and the accelerator

pedal at the same time.

Depressing the brake pedal constantly

results in excessive and premature wear to

the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy

load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive

on for a short while. This allows the airflow to

cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain

without braking, there may be a delayed reac-

tion from the brakes when braking for the first

time. This may also occur after the vehicle has

been washed or driven through deep water.

You have to depress the brake pedal more

firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the

vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle

washed, brake firmly while paying attention to

the traffic conditions. This will warm up the

brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly

and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-

treated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-

due may form on the brake discs and brake

pads. This can result in a significantly longer

braking distance.

132

Driving tips

Driving and parking

Observe the following rules when driving on salt-

treated roads:

In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the

brakes occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditions.

Carefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.

Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes

The brake fluid level may be too low, if:

if the red brake warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster and

you hear a warning tone while the engine is

running

Observe additional warning messages in the

multifunction display.

The brake fluid level may be too low due to

brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop to

arrange this.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake

system must be carried out at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid

replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to

moderate loads, you should test the functional-

ity of your brakes at regular intervals.

Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 59).

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends only installing the following brake disks

and brake pads/linings:

brake disks that have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz

brake pads/linings that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent

standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can

compromise the safety of your vehicle.

Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/

linings on an axle at the same time. Always

install new brake pads/linings when replacing

brake disks.

The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake

disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and

threaded connection is matched.

The use of brake disks other than those

approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the

track width and is subject to approval, if appli-

cable.

Shock-type loads when handling the brake

discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead

to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-

weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on

the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the

brake plate.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use

brake fluid that has been specially approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-

sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake

fluid which has not been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an

equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's

operating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramic

brakes

The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy

loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This

will depend on:

Speed

Braking force

Environmental conditions, such as tempera-

ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake

system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake

discs, depends on the individual driving style

and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-

age that will be valid under all circumstances. An

aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

You can obtain more information on this from a

qualified specialist workshop.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after several

hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for

this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and

braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-

ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear

warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note

any brake status messages in the multifunction

display. Especially for high performance driving,

it is important to maintain and have the brake

system checked regularly.

Driving tips

133

Driving and parking

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain depth on

the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-

planing occurring, even if:

you drive at low speeds

the tires have adequate tread depth

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in

conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,

you must drive in the following manner:

lower your speed

avoid ruts

avoid sudden steering movements

brake carefully

Driving on flooded roads

Do not drive through flooded areas. Check

the depth of any water before driving through

it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-

erwise, water could enter the vehicle interior

or engine compartment. It can then damage

the engine's or automatic transmission's

electronic components. It can also be sucked

in by the engine's air intake connection and

cause engine damage.

Winter driving

WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate

ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the

vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating

running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area

around the vehicle are clear of snow. To

ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a

window on the side of the vehicle that is not

facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-

faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and

braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be

stopped when moving at low speed:

Shift the transmission to position i.

The outside temperature indicator is not

designed to serve as an ice-warning device and

is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing

point do not guarantee that the road surface is

free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in

wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could

skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always

adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to

suit the prevailing weather conditions.

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

Further information on driving with snow chains

(Y page 265).

Further information on driving with summer

tires (Y page 265).

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-

tion (Y page 265).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road speed

for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid

exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower

gear in good time on long and steep downhill

gradients. This is especially important if the

vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use

of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves

the load on the brake system and prevents the

134

Driving systems

Driving and parking

brakes from overheating and wearing too

quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-

ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady

speed for a prolonged period. You can store any

road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Cruise control lever

Activates or increases speed

;

Activates at the current speed or last stored

speed

Activates or reduces speed

Deactivates cruise control

When you activate cruise control, the stored

speed is shown in the multifunction display for

five seconds. In addition, the é symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

Speedometer with segments: when cruise

control is activated, the segments from the

stored speed to the end of the scale light up.

Storing and maintaining the current

speed

You can store the current speed if you are driv-

ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or

down ;.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-

matically maintains the stored speed.

Cruise control may be unable to maintain

the stored speed on uphill gradients. The

stored speed is resumed when the gradient

evens out. Cruise control maintains the

stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-

matically applying the brakes.

Storing, maintaining and calling up a

speed

WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it is lower

than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-

ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the

vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There

is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-

tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The first time cruise control is activated, it

stores the current speed or regulates the

speed of the vehicle to the previously stored

speed.

Driving systems

135

Driving and parking

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment

until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to

the speed set.

Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up : or down ; to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up : or down ; the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-

ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up : or down ;

beyond the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up : or down ; the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

Cruise control is not deactivated if you

depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-

ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the

vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after

you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-

trol:

Briefly press the cruise control lever for-

wards :.

Brake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated

under the following conditions:

the electric parking brake is applied.

you are driving slower than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

if ESP

intervenes or you deactivate ESP

you shift the transmission to position i

while driving.

If cruise control is deactivated, a warning tone

sounds. You will see the Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off

message in the multifunction display for approx-

imately five seconds.

When you switch off the engine, the last

speed stored is cleared.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

General notes

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC regulates the

speed and automatically helps you maintain the

distance from the vehicle detected in front.

Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar

sensor system. Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC brakes automatically so that the set

speed is not exceeded.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long

and steep downhill gradients. This is especially

important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you

will make use of the braking effect of the engine.

This relieves the load on the brake system and

prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-

ing too quickly.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects

that there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle

in front, you will be warned visually and audibly.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot pre-

vent a collision without your intervention. An

intermittent warning tone will then sound and

the distance warning lamp will light up in the

instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order

to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or

take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

136

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in

the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and

120 mph (200 km/h).

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

while driving on roads with steep gradients.

As Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC transmits

radar waves, it can be mistaken for the radar

detectors used by the traffic authorities. You

can refer to the relevant chapter in the Opera-

tor's Manual if questions are asked about this.

USA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The

radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-

motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-

ing, or altering of the device will void any war-

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device

will void any warranties, and is not permitted.

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Important safety notes

WARNING

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not

react to:

people or animals

stationary objects in the road, e.g. stopped

or parked vehicles

oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

may neither give warnings nor intervene in

such situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

WARNING

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot

always clearly identify other road users and

complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC can:

give an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicle

neither give a warning nor intervene

accelerate or brake unexpectedly

There is a risk of an accident.

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to

brake, especially if Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC warns you.

WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up

to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.

If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC

PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is

a risk of an accident.

In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and

try to take evasive action.

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or

the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle

brakes automatically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the

HOLD function in the following or similar sit-

uations:

when towing the vehicle

in the car wash

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can neither

reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt

your driving style, nor override the laws of phys-

ics. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot

take into account road, weather or traffic con-

ditions. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is

only an aid. You are responsible for the distance

to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for

braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Driving systems

137

Driving and parking

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

In road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in

heavy traffic or on winding roads

on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-

erating could cause the drive wheels to lose

traction and the vehicle could then skid

when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not

detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g.

motorcycles, or vehicles driving in a staggered

formation.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

There is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

There is snow or heavy rain

There is interference by other radar sources

There are strong radar reflections, for exam-

ple, in parking garages

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer

detects a vehicle in front, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC may unexpectedly accelerate to the

speed stored.

This speed may:

be too high if you are driving in a turning lane

or an exit lane

be so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving on the left (in countries where

they drive on the right)

be so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving on the right (right-hand drive

countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Activates or increases speed

;

Activates or reduces speed

Deactivates Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

Activates at the current speed or last stored

speed

Sets a specified minimum distance

Activating Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

Activation conditions

To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC,

the following conditions must be fulfilled:

the engine must be started. It may take up to

two minutes of driving before Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC is ready for use.

the electric parking brake must be released.

ESP

must be active, but not intervening.

the transmission must be in position h.

the driver's door must be closed when you

shift from j to h or your seat belt must be

fastened.

the front-passenger door and rear doors must

be closed.

138

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Activating

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ;, up : or down = .

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted.

To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up : to the pressure

point for a higher speed, or down = for a

lower speed.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up or down, the last speed stored is increased

or reduced.

To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-

ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up : beyond the

pressure point for a higher speed, or down =

for a lower speed.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up or down, the last speed stored is increased

or reduced.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the

vehicle in front, but only up to the desired

stored speed.

If you do not fully release the accelerator

pedal, the Active Distance Assist Sus‐Active Distance Assist Sus‐

pendedpended message appears in the multifunction

display. The set distance to a slower-moving

vehicle in front will then not be maintained.

You will be driving at the speed you determine

by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed

that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ; or press it up : or down =.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted.

Activating at the current speed or last

stored speed

WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs

from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates. If you do not know the

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or

brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-

tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The first time Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current

speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to

the previously stored speed.

Driving systems

139

Driving and parking

Driving with Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

Pulling away and driving

If you want to pull away with Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot

from the brake pedal.

Briefly pull cruise control lever : towards

you.

Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed

to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is

detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to

the set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is

facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on

a different line from another vehicle. The vehi-

cle then brakes automatically. There is a risk

of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times.

If there is no vehicle in front, Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC operates in the same way as

cruise control.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a

slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your

vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selec-

ted is maintained.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a

faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the

driving speed. However, the vehicle is only

accelerated up to the speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive program

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC supports a

sporty driving style when you have selected the

S or S+ drive program. Acceleration behind the

vehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice-

ably more dynamic. When you select the C drive

program, the vehicle accelerates more gently.

This setting is recommended in stop-and-start

traffic.

Additional information on selecting the drive

program (Y page 116).

Changing lanes

If you change to the overtaking lane, Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC helps you if:

you are driving at a speed greater than

45 mph (70 km/h)

you switch on the appropriate turn signal

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not

currently detect a danger of collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is

accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if

changing lanes takes too long or if the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle in front

becomes too small.

When you change lanes, Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC monitors the left lane.

Stopping

WARNING

If you leave the driver's seat when the vehicle

is only being braked by Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC, it could roll away:

if there is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply

if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is

deactivated using the cruise control lever,

for example by a vehicle occupant or from

outside the vehicle

if the electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-

pered with

if the battery is disconnected

if the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehi-

cle occupant

There is a risk of an accident.

Always deactivate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle against

rolling away before you leave it.

Further information about deactivating Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 142).

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects

that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes

your vehicle until it is stationary.

140

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-

tionary and you do not need to depress the

brake.

After a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service

brake.

Depending on the specified minimum dis-

tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at

a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in

front. The specified minimum distance is set

using the control on the cruise control lever.

The electric parking brake is applied automati-

cally if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is

active when the vehicle is stationary and:

the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the

driver's door is open

the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function

a system malfunction occurs

the power supply is insufficient

If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may

also shift to position j automatically.

Setting a speed

Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up : or down ; to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up : or down ; the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-

ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up : or down ;

beyond the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up : or down ;, the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

If you accelerate to overtake, Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's

speed to the last speed stored after you have

finished overtaking.

Setting a specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance for

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC by varying

the time span between one and two seconds.

This determines the distance that Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC is to maintain from the

vehicle in front, depending on the road speed.

You can see this distance in the multifunction

display (Y page 142).

Make sure that you maintain the minimum

distance to the vehicle in front as required by

law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front

if necessary.

To increase: turn control ; in direction =.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then main-

tains a greater distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front.

To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then main-

tains a shorter distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front.

Driving systems

141

Driving and parking

Deactivating Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

There are several ways to deactivate Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC:

Briefly press the cruise control lever for-

wards :.

Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.

When you deactivate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC, the Active Distance AssistActive Distance Assist

OffOff message appears on the multifunction dis-

play for approximately five seconds.

The last speed stored remains stored until

you switch off the engine.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not

deactivated if you depress the accelerator

pedal.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automati-

cally deactivated if:

you engage the electric parking brake or if the

vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-

tric parking brake

ESP

intervenes or you deactivate ESP

the transmission is in position j, k or i

you pull the cruise control lever towards you

in order to pull away and the front-passenger

door or one of the rear doors is open

the vehicle is skidding

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-

vated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see

the Active Distance Assist OffActive Distance Assist Off message

on the multifunction display for approximately

five seconds.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a

vehicle in front, the segments between speed of

vehicle in front : to stored speed ; light up.

For design reasons, the speed displayed on

the speedometer may differ slightly from the

speed set for Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC.

Display when Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC is deactivated

On the on-board computer, you can select the

assistance graphics display.

Vehicle in front, if detected

;

Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front

Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable

Your vehicle

Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function

using the on-board computer (Y page 167).

142

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Display when Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC is activated

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active

(text appears only when the cruise control

lever is actuated)

;

Vehicle in front, if detected

Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable

Your vehicle

Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function

using the on-board computer (Y page 167).

You will see the stored speed for approximately

five seconds when you activate Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC.

Tips for driving with Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC

General notes

Pay particular attention in the following traffic

situations:

Cornering, going into and coming out of a

bend

Vehicles traveling on a different line

Other vehicles changing lanes

Narrow vehicles

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

Crossing vehicles

In such situations, brake if necessary. Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC will then be deacti-

vated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of a

bend

The ability of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

to detect vehicles when cornering is limited.

Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not

detect vehicles that are not driving in the middle

of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front

will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not

detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance

to this vehicle will be too short.

Driving systems

143

Driving and parking

Narrow vehicles

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not yet

detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the

road because of its narrow width. The distance

to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not

brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for

example, the detected vehicle turns a corner

and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is revealed,

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC will not brake

for them.

Crossing vehicles

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may mistak-

enly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC at,

for example, a traffic light with crossing traffic

could cause your vehicle to pull away at the

wrong time.

HOLD

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in the

following situations:

when pulling away, especially on steep slopes

when maneuvering on steep slopes

when waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver

having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD

function deactivated when you depress the

accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD

function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol-

lowing situations when you leave the vehicle:

if there is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply

if the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brake

pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant

if the electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-

pered with or the battery is disconnected

There is a risk of an accident.

Always deactivate the HOLD function and

secure the vehicle against rolling away before

you leave it.

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or

the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle

brakes automatically in certain situations.

144

Driving systems

Driving and parking

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the

HOLD function in the following or similar sit-

uations:

when towing the vehicle

in the car wash

Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 145).

Activation conditions

You can activate the HOLD function if all of the

following conditions are fulfilled:

the vehicle is stationary.

the engine is running or if it has been auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function.

the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is

fastened.

the electric parking brake is released.

the transmission is in position h, k or i.

Activating the HOLD function

Make sure that the activation conditions are

met.

Depress the brake pedal.

Quickly depress the brake pedal further until

HOLDHOLD : appears in the multifunction display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can

release the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time

does not activate the HOLD function, wait

briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

The HOLD function is deactivated if:

you depress the accelerator and the trans-

mission is in position h or k

you shift the transmission to position j

you apply the brakes again with a certain

amount of pressure until the HOLDHOLD display dis-

appears from the multifunction display

you secure the vehicle using the electric park-

ing brake

After a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service

brake.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle

automatically if the HOLD function is activated

when the vehicle is stationary and:

the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the

driver's door is open

the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function

a system malfunction occurs

the power supply is not sufficient

If the electric parking brake is not operational, a

horn will sound at regular intervals. The HOLD

function must then be deactivated.

If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may

also be shifted to position j automatically.

The Brake ImmediatelyBrake Immediately message may also

appear in the multifunction display.

Immediately depress the brake firmly until the

warning message in the multifunction display

goes out.

The HOLD function is deactivated. If you turn off

the engine, take off your seat belt or open the

driver's door when the HOLD function is activa-

ted, a horn will sound at regular intervals. The

sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that

the HOLD function is still activated. If you

attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes

louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you

have deactivated the HOLD function.

After switching off the engine, it can only be

started again once you have deactivated the

HOLD function.

Driving systems

145

Driving and parking

RACE START

Important safety notes

RACE START must not be used on normal

roads. RACE START must only be activated

and used on dedicated road circuits, outside

of public road use.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration from

a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip

road surface is required and the vehicle and tires

must be in good working order.

WARNING

If you use RACE START, individual tires may

start to spin and the vehicle could skid.

Depending on the selected ESP

mode, there

is an increased risk of skidding and having an

accident. Make sure that no persons, animals

or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.

Observe the safety notes on driving safety

systems (Y page 58).

Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-

tion on ESP

(Y page 62).

Observe the specific service requirements

for racetrack mode operation (Y page 241).

Activation conditions

You can activate RACE START under the follow-

ing conditions:

the doors are closed

the engine is running and the engine and

transmission are at operating temperature.

This is the case when the oil temperature dis-

play in the multifunction display is shown in

white (Y page 170).

ESP

is functioning correctly (Y page 62)

the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead

position

the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is

depressed sufficiently (left foot)

the transmission is in position h

drive program S, S+ or RACE is selected

(Y page 116).

Activating RACE START (AMG GT S)

When manual mode (Y page 123) is active,

the transmission automatically shifts up in

the RACE START drive program. This function

supports maximum acceleration with RACE

START. After going through an accelerating

process once from a stationary position, this

function is automatically deactivated.

Depress the brake pedal with your left foot

and keep it depressed.

Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shift-

ers.

The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPRACE START Confirm: Paddle UP

Cancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in

the multifunction display.

Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.

If the activation conditions are no longer ful-

filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACERACE

START Not Possible See Operator'sSTART Not Possible See Operator's

ManualManual message appears on the multifunc-

tion display.

To cancel: pull the left-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter (Y page 121).

To confirm: pull the right-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter (Y page 121).

The RACERACE STARTSTART AvailableAvailable DepressDepress gasgas

pedal.pedal. message appears on the multifunc-

tion display.

If you do not depress the accelerator pedal

within a few seconds, RACE START is can-

celed. The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message

appears on the multifunction display.

Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

The engine speed is increased.

The RACERACE STARTSTART ReleaseRelease brakebrake toto startstart

message appears in the multifunction display.

If you do not release the brake pedal within

a short time, RACE START will be canceled.

The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message

appears on the multifunction display.

Take your foot off the brake, but keep the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-

ation.

The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActive message appears in

the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle

reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-

ada: 50 km/h).

146

Driving systems

Driving and parking

RACE START is deactivated immediately if you

release the accelerator pedal during RACE

START or if any of the activation conditions are

no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐RACE START Not Pos‐

sible See Operator's Manualsible See Operator's Manual or RACERACE

START CanceledSTART Canceled message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

If RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again

after the vehicle has been driven a certain

distance.

Activating RACE START (AMG GT C)

When manual mode (Y page 123) is active,

the transmission automatically shifts up in

the RACE START drive program. This function

supports maximum acceleration with RACE

START. After going through an accelerating

process once from a stationary position, this

function is automatically deactivated.

Depress the brake pedal with your left foot

and keep it depressed.

Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

The engine speed is increased.

The RACERACE STARTSTART ReleaseRelease brakebrake toto startstart

message appears in the multifunction display.

To adjust RACE START: pull the left-hand or

right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle.

RACE START adjustment:

left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle:

to reduce engine speed

right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle:

to increase engine speed

The engine speed is adjusted.

The segments in the multifunction display

flicker rapidly.

If you do not release the brake pedal within

a short time, RACE START will be canceled.

The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message

appears in the multifunction display.

Take your foot off the brake, but keep the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-

ation.

The RACE START ActiveRACE START Active message appears

on the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle

reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-

ada: 50 km/h).

RACE START is deactivated immediately if you

release the accelerator pedal during RACE

START or if any of the activation conditions are

no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐RACE START Not Pos‐

sible See Operator's Manualsible See Operator's Manual or RACERACE

START CanceledSTART Canceled message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

If RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again

after the vehicle has been driven a certain

distance.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem

General notes

The electronically controlled damping system

works continuously. This improves driving

safety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel

and depends on:

your driving style, e.g. sporty

the road surface condition, e.g. bumps

your individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or

Comfort

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Y page 111).

Adjusting the suspension settings

Adjusts AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem

;

Right indicator lamp

Left indicator lamp

The suspension setting is adjusted using but-

ton : on the center console.

Driving systems

147

Driving and parking

The suspension setting can also be adjusted

using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller

(Y page 116).

Setting "Sport" mode

Press button : repeatedly until left indicator

lamp = lights up.

You have selected Sport mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORTAMG Suspension System SPORT mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in

Sport mode ensures even better contact with

the road. Select this mode when employing a

sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country

roads.

Setting "Sport +" mode

Press button : repeatedly until indicator

lamps ; and = light up.

You have selected Sport + mode.

The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem SPORT +SPORT + mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

The very firm setting of the suspension setting in

Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact

with the road. Select this mode only when driv-

ing on race circuits.

Setting "Comfort" mode

Press button : repeatedly until indicator

lamps ; and = go out.

You have selected Comfort mode.

The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem COMFORTCOMFORT mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of

your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this

mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving

style, but also when driving at speed on straight

roads, e. g. highways.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic

parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area

around your vehicle using six sensors in the

front bumper and four sensors in the rear

bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you

the distance between your vehicle and a detec-

ted obstacle visually and audibly.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is

not a replacement for your attention to your

immediate surroundings. You are always

responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and

exiting a parking space. Make sure that there

are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the

maneuvering area while maneuvering and park-

ing or exiting parking spaces.

When parking, pay particular attention to

objects above or below the sensors, such as

flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects

when they are in the immediate vicinity of the

vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the

objects.

The sensors may not detect snow and other

objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car

wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or

a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function

correctly on uneven terrain.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-

matically when you:

switch on the ignition

shift the transmission to position h, k or

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at

speeds above approx. 11 mph (18 km/h). It is

reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors

General notes

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into

account obstacles located:

below the detection range, e.g. people, ani-

mals or objects.

above the detection range, e.g. overhanging

loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

148

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side

(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.

They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean

the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch

or damage them (Y page 246).

Range

Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)

;

Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)

Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)

Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-

evant warning displays light up and a warning

tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-

imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle

;

Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle

Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distance

between the sensors and the obstacle. The

warning display for the front area is in the instru-

ment cluster. The warning display for the rear

area is located on the cover behind the seats in

the rear compartment.

The warning display for each side of the vehicle

is divided into five yellow and two red segments.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if

operational readiness indicator = lights up.

The selected transmission position and the

direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

mine which warning display is active when the

engine is running.

Transmission posi-

tion

Warning display

Front area activated

k, i or the vehicle

is rolling backwards

Rear and front areas

activated

No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches a detected obstacle, depending on

the vehicle's distance from the obstacle:

From the:

sixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-

mittent warning tone for approximately two

seconds.

seventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately two seconds.

Driving systems

149

Driving and parking

This indicates that you have now reached the

minimum distance.

Deactivating or activating Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC

Indicator lamp

;

Deactivates or activates Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-

cally activated when you set the Start/Stop

button to key position 2.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Only the red segments in

the Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC warning

displays are lit. You also

hear a warning tone for

approximately two sec-

onds.

Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is then

deactivated and the indi-

cator lamp on the

PARKTRONIC button

lights up.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-

vated.

If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Only the red segments in

the Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC warning

displays are lit. Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC is

then deactivated.

The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-

ference.

Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 246).

Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-

sound waves.

Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different

location.

150

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera : is located in the rear

bumper, underneath the trunk lid.

Rear view camera : is an optical parking and

maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your

vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-

tem display.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

The text shown in the multimedia system

display depends on the language setting. The

following are examples of rear view camera

messages in the multimedia system display.

Important safety notes

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a

replacement for your attention to your immedi-

ate surroundings. You are always responsible

for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure

that there are no persons, animals or objects

etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering

and parking in parking spaces.

The rear view camera will not function or will

function only to a limited extent if:

in heavy rain, snow or fog

at night or in very dark places

if the camera is exposed to very bright light

if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)

if there is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-

ter

if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.

Observe the notes on cleaning

(Y page 246)

if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this

case, have the camera position and setting

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the

reversing camera may be restricted due to addi-

tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.

license plate holder).

The guide lines in the multimedia system display

show the distances to your vehicle. The distan-

ces only apply to road level.

Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera

To activate: ensure that SmartKey position

2 has been selected with the Start/Stop

button.

Make sure that the Activation by R gearActivation by R gear

function is selected in the multimedia system

(see the Digital Owner's Manual).

Engage reverse gear.

The area behind the vehicle is shown with

guide lines in the multimedia system display.

The image from the rear view camera is avail-

able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-

vates if you shift the transmission to j or after

driving forwards a short distance.

Messages in the multimedia system dis-

play

The rear view camera may show a distorted view

of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.

Obstacles are not shown by the rear view cam-

era in the following locations:

very close to the rear bumper

under the rear bumper

Objects not at ground level may appear to

be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

the bumper of a parked vehicle

the drawbar of a trailer

the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

the rear section of an HGV

a slanted post

Driving systems

151

Driving and parking

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the bottom-

most guideline.

Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the

vehicle

;

White guide line without steering input –

vehicle width including the exterior mirrors

(static)

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

Yellow lane marking the course the tires will

take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic)

Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

Bumper

Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the transmis-

sion is in position k.

The distance specifications only apply to

objects that are at ground level.

Front warning display

;

Additional measurement operational readi-

ness indicator for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

Rear warning display

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:

when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-

tional (Y page 149), additional measurement

operational readiness indicator ; appears in

the multimedia system display. If the Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active

or light up, warning displays : and = are also

active or light up correspondingly in the multi-

media system display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space

without steering input

White guide line without steering input –

vehicle width including the exterior mirrors

(static)

;

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

152

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

Make sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Y page 151).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

With the help of white guide line :, check

whether the vehicle will fit into the parking

space.

Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully

back up until you reach the end position.

Red guide line ? is then at the end of parking

space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the

parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-

ing input

Parking space marking

;

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

Drive past the parking space and bring the

vehicle to a standstill.

Make sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Y page 151).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the

steering wheel in the direction of the parking

space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-

ing space marking :.

Maintain the steering input and reverse care-

fully.

Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, at the current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in

front of the parking space.

The white lane should be as close to parallel

with the parking space marking as possible.

White guide line at the current steering input

;

Parking space marking

Turn the steering wheel to the center position

while the vehicle is stationary.

Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

;

White guide line without steering input

End of parking space

Driving systems

153

Driving and parking

Back up carefully until you have reached the

final position.

Red guide line : is then at the end of parking

space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the

parking space.

Wide-angle function

Symbol for the wide-angle view function

;

Your vehicle

Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

You can also use the rear view camera to select

a wide-angle view.

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-

tional (Y page 149), a symbol for your own vehi-

cle appears in the multimedia system display. If

the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-

plays are active, warning displays = light up in

the multimedia system display in yellow or red

accordingly.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,

monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is

active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph

(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST

detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-

ing lapses in concentration on the part of the

driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It

might not always recognize fatigue or increasing

inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them

at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-

rested and attentive driver.

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is

restricted and warnings may be delayed or not

occur at all:

if the length of the journey is less than approx-

imately 30 minutes

if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface

is uneven or if there are potholes

if there is a strong side wind

if you have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-

eration

if you are predominantly driving slower than

37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph

(200 km/h)

if the time has been set incorrectly

in active driving situations, such as when you

change lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment

is deleted and restarted when you continue the

journey:

when you switch off the engine

when you take off your seat belt and open the

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to

take a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-

played in the assistance menu (Y page 168) of

the on-board computer.

Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION

ASSIST using the on-board computer

(Y page 167).

154

Driving systems

Driving and parking

The following information is displayed:

the length of the journey since the last break.

the attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST (Attention LevelAttention Level), displayed in a

bar display in five levels from high to low.

if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate

the attention level and cannot issue a warn-

ing, the System SuspendedSystem Suspended message

appears. The bar display then changes what is

shown, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below

37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph

(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-

board computer (Y page 168).

The system determines the attention level of

the driver depending on the setting selected:

Selection of StandardStandard: the sensitivity with

which the system determines the attention level

is set to normal.

Selection of SensitiveSensitive: the sensitivity is set

higher. The attention level detected by ATTEN-

TION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the

driver is warned earlier.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-

play in the Assistance display.

When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,

it is automatically reactivated after the engine

has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-

responds to the last selection activated (Stand‐Stand‐

ardard or SensitiveSensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration

are detected, a warning appears in the multi-

function display: ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST Take aTake a

Break!Break!.

In addition to the message shown in the multi-

function display, you will then hear a warning

tone.

If necessary, take a break.

Confirm the message by pressing the a

button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good

time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take

a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects

increasing lapses in concentration, you will be

warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest.

This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still

detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-

ing lapses in concentration.

If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-

play, a service station search is performed in

COMAND. You can select a service station and

navigation to this service station will then begin.

This function can be activated and deactivated

in COMAND.

Lane Tracking package

General notes

The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind

Spot Assist (Y page 155) and Lane Keeping

Assist (Y page 157).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes

Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either

side of the vehicle that are not visible to the

driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-

sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors

draws your attention to vehicles detected in the

monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-

responding turn signal to change lanes, you will

also receive a visual warning and hear a warning

tone.

Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes

WARNING

Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot area

vehicles which approach with a large speed

differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give

warnings in such situations. There is a risk of

an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions care-

fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for

attentive driving. Always ensure that there is

Driving systems

155

Driving and parking

sufficient distance to the side for other road

users and obstacles.

USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as

a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor

is intended for use in an automotive radar

system only. Removing, tampering with, or

altering the device will void any warranties,

and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-

per with, alter, or use in any non-approved

way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-

grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the

bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The

sensors must not be covered, e.g. by overhang-

ing loads. Following a severe impact or in the

event of damage to the bumpers, have the func-

tion of the radar sensors checked at a qualified

specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no

longer work properly.

Monitoring area

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

there is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain, snow or spray

there are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicycles

the road has very wide lanes

the road has narrow lanes

you are not driving in the middle of the lane

there are barriers or other road boundaries

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not

indicated.

(Example)

At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the

vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up

to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your

vehicle, as shown in the picture.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the

lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be

indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-

ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the

case if there are vehicles driving at the inner

edge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:

warnings may be issued in error when driving

close to crash barriers or similar solid lane

borders

warnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a pro-

longed time

Warning lamp

156

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in

the monitoring range are then not indicated.

If Blind Spot Assist is activated, warning lamp :

in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds

of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above

20 mph (30 km/h), the warning lamp goes out

and Blind Spot Assist is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot

monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-

ing side lights up red. This warning is always

emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot

monitoring range from behind or from the side.

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only

occurs if the difference in speed is less than

7 mph (12 km/h).

If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist

is not operational.

The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-

matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-

roundings.

Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of

Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-

sponding turn signal, a double warning tone

sounds. The red warning lamp flashes on the

relevant exterior mirror. If the turn signal

remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by

the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exte-

rior mirror. No further warning tone sounds.

Activating Blind Spot Assist

Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated

in the on-board computer (Y page 168).

Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/

Stop button.

Warning lamps in the exterior mirrors light up

red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then

turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of

your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-

era : which is attached behind the top of the

windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane

markings on the road and can warn you before

you leave your lane unintentionally.

This function is available in the range between

40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes

over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of

intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for

up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notes

WARNING

Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly

detect lane markings.

In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:

give an unnecessary warning

not give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and keep within the lane, especially

if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not

return the vehicle to the original lane. There is

a risk of an accident.

You should always steer, brake or accelerate

yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-

ing Assist.

Driving systems

157

Driving and parking

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-

ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-

dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane

Keeping Assist cannot take into account the

road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-

ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible

for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-

cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-

ing in your lane.

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-

cle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function

if:

there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient

illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,

fog or heavy spray

there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the

sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if

the road surface is wet)

the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-

ity of the camera

there are no or several unclear lane markings

for one lane, e.g. roadworks

the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-

ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

the distance to the vehicle in front is too short

and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-

ted

the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch off, cross one another or merge

the road is narrow and winding

there are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-

board computer; to do so, select StandardStandard or

AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 169).

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,

the lines in the Assistance display are shown

in green (Y page 167). Lane Keeping Assist is

ready for use.

Standard

When StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

you have switched on the turn signal. In this

event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-

tain period of time

a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP

Adaptive

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

you have switched on the turn signal. In this

event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-

tain period of time

a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,

BAS or ESP

you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

you brake hard

you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly

you cut the corner on a sharp bend

In order that you are warned only when neces-

sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-

ing, the system detects certain conditions and

warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

you approach the outer lane marking on a

bend

the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway

the system detects solid lane markings

The warning vibration occurs later if:

the road has narrow lanes

you cut the corner on a bend

158

Driving systems

Driving and parking

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when

operating the on-board computer.

WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-

functioned, you may not recognize function

restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The

operating safety of your vehicle may be

impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked

at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-

ately.

The on-board computer only shows messages or

warnings from certain systems in the multifunc-

tion display. You should therefore make sure

your vehicle is operating safely at all times.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is

impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-

tration (Y page 34).

Displays and operation

Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate

which speed range is available:

Cruise control activated (Y page 134):

The segments light up from the stored speed

to the type-tested maximum speed.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated

(Y page 136):

One or two segments in the set speed range

light up.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a

vehicle in front moving more slowly than the

stored speed:

The segments between the speed of the vehi-

cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer

Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this

could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the

engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the

engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-

play indicates the measured air temperature

and not the road surface temperature.

The outside temperature display is in the multi-

function display (Y page 161).

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature gauge

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is over-

heated or when there is a fire in the engine

compartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk of

injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before

opening the hood. If there is a fire in the

engine compartment, keep the hood closed

and contact the fire department.

Displays and operation

159

On-board computer and displays

If the coolant temperature is too high, a dis-

play message is shown.

If the coolant temperature display is in the

area marked in red, do not continue driving.

Otherwise, the engine will be damaged.

The coolant temperature display is in the lower

section of the tachometer (Y page 34).

Under normal operating conditions and with the

specified coolant level, the coolant temperature

display may rise to the red marking.

Operating the on-board computer

Multifunction display

;

Right control panel

Left control panel

To activate the on-board computer: set the

Start/Stop button to key position 1.

You can control the multifunction display and

the settings in the on-board computer using the

buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Left control panel

Opens the menu list

Press briefly:

Scrolls in lists

Selects a menu or function

In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu:

opens the track or station list and

selects a station, an audio track or

a video scene

In the TelephoneTelephone menu: switches

to the phone book and selects a

name or a telephone number

Press and hold:

Scrolls quickly through all lists

In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu:

selects a station, audio track or

video scene using rapid scrolling

In the TelephoneTelephone menu: starts

rapid scrolling if the phone book is

open

In all menus: confirms the selected

entry in the list

In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu:

opens the list of available radio

sources or media

In the TelephoneTelephone menu: switches

to the phone book and starts dial-

ing the selected number

Switches off the Voice Control

System (see the Digital Operator's

Manual)

Press briefly:

Back

In the RadioRadio or MediaMedia menu: dese-

lects the track or station list or list

of available radio sources or media

Hides display messages

Exits the telephone book/redial

memory

Press and hold:

Calls up the standard display in the

TripTrip menu

160

Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays

Right control panel

Rejects or ends a call

Exits the telephone book/redial

memory

Makes or accepts a call

Switches to the redial memory

Adjusts the volume

Mute

Switches on the Voice Control Sys-

tem (see the Digital Operator's

Manual)

Multifunction display

Transmission position (Y page 119)

;

Time

Outside temperature (Y page 159)

Display panel

Additional speedometer (Y page 170)

Display panel ? shows the selected menu or

submenu and display messages.

Additional speedometer A displays the speed

in the respective unit that is not shown in the

multifunction display.

To open the menu list: press ò on the

steering wheel.

Display panel ? appears in the menu list.

Possible displays in the multifunction display:

= Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

(Y page 148)

¯ Cruise control (Y page 134)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 98)

è ECO start/stop function (Y page 113)

ë HOLD function (Y page 144)

Menus and submenus

Menu overview

Press the ò button on the steering wheel to

open the menu list.

Operating the on-board computer (Y page 160).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can

select the following menu:

TripTrip menu (Y page 161)

NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Y page 163)

RadioRadio menu (Y page 164)

MediaMedia menu (Y page 165)

TelephoneTelephone menu (Y page 166)

Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 167)

ServiceService menu (Y page 168)

SettingsSettings menu (Y page 168)

AMGAMG menu (Y page 170)

Trip menu

Standard display

Press and hold the % button on the steer-

ing wheel until the TripTrip menu with trip odom-

eter : and odometer ; appears.

Menus and submenus

161

On-board computer and displays

Calling up the range

Press the ò button on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TripTrip menu.

Press : or 9 to select the approximate

RangeRange.

The approximate range that can be covered

depends on the fuel level and your current

driving style. If there is only a small amount of

fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-

eled C appears instead of approximate

range.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Reset"

Distance

;

Driving time

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TripTrip menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select From StartFrom Start or

From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the FromFrom StartStart submenu are cal-

culated from the start of a journey, while the

values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu are calcu-

lated from the last time the submenu was reset

(Y page 162).

In the following cases the trip computer is auto-

matically reset From StartFrom Start:

the ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.

999 hours have been exceeded.

9999 miles have been exceeded.

The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automatically

reset if the value exceeds 9999 hours or

99,999 miles.

Digital speedometer

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TripTrip menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

digital speedometer.

Resetting values

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TripTrip menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

function that you wish to reset.

Press the a button.

Press : to select YesYes and press a to

confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-

tions:

Trip odometer

"From Start" trip computer

"From Reset" trip computer

162

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions

In the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction display

shows navigation instructions. You can find fur-

ther information on navigation instructions in

the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's

Manual.

Switch on the multimedia system.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the NaviNavi menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Route guidance not active

Direction of travel

;

Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

Distance to the next destination

;

Estimated arrival time

Distance to the next change of direction

Current road

Change of direction announced with a

lane recommendation

Target of the change of direction

;

Distance to the change of direction

Change-of-direction symbol

Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)

Possible lane

Lane not recommended (dark gray)

On multilane roads, new lane recommendations

can be displayed for the next change of direction

if the digital map supports this data. During the

change of direction, new lanes may be added.

Lane not recommended B: you will not be able

to complete the next change of direction if you

stay in this lane.

Possible lane A: you will only be able to com-

plete the next change of direction in this lane.

Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be

able to complete the next change of direction

and the one after that.

Menus and submenus

163

On-board computer and displays

Change of direction without lane recom-

mendation

Road into which the change of direction

leads

;

Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is to be made, you

will see symbol = for the change of direction

and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator

shortens towards the top of the display as you

approach the point of the announced change of

direction. The change of direction starts once

distance display ; reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-

dation

Road into which the change of direction

leads

;

Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

Change-of-direction symbol

Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga-

tion system

Additional information

Other possible additional information:

New Route...New Route... or Calculating Route...Calculating Route...

A new route is calculated.

Road Not MappedRoad Not Mapped

The vehicle position is inside the area of the

digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.

newly built streets, car parks or private land.

No RouteNo Route

No route could be calculated to the selected

destination.

You have reached the destination or an inter-

mediate destination.

Radio menu

Frequency range

;

Station with preset position

Name of artist

Name of track

The multifunction display shows station ; with

station frequency or station name. The preset

164

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

position is only displayed along with station ; if

this has been stored.

You can store stations ; in the multimedia sys-

tem.

Switch on the multimedia system.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the RadioRadio menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Currently set station ; appears in the multi-

function display.

To open the station list: press : or 9

briefly.

To select a station in the station list:

press : or 9 briefly.

To select a station in the station list using

rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9.

To select the frequency range or station

memory: press a briefly.

Press : or 9 to select the frequency

range or station memory.

Press a to confirm your selection.

SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a

normal radio.

Further information about radio operation can

be found in the multimedia system in the Dig-

ital Operator's Manual.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and playback

mode (audio or video) at any time in the MediaMedia

menu.

Switch on the multimedia system.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the MediaMedia menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

To open/close the media sources list:

press a briefly.

The list shows the following media sources,

for example:

Disc (CD/DVD) (DVD, COMAND only)

SD card (COMAND)

Media Register (COMAND)

USB storage device

Bluetooth

capable audio device

Please observe further information on media

support and media operation in the multimedia

system.

Operating an audio player or media

Media source, e.g. name of USB memory

stick

;

Current title

Name of artist

Name of album

Folder name

You can play audio files from various audio play-

ers or data media, depending on the equipment

installed in the vehicle.

Switch on the multimedia system.

Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the main menu.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the MediaMedia menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

To select audio player or data carrier:

press a briefly to open the list of media

sources.

Press : or 9 to select the correspond-

ing audio player or media.

Press a to confirm.

To open the track list: press : or 9

briefly.

Menus and submenus

165

On-board computer and displays

To select the next or previous track in the

track list: press : or 9 briefly.

To select a track from the track list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9

until the desired track is reached.

If you press and hold the button, the speed of

rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not

all audio players or media support this func-

tion.

If the corresponding track information is stored

on the audio drive or audio media, the multi-

function display may display the following:

track number

track name

artist

album

Video DVD operation

Switch on the multimedia system.

Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the list of menus.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the MediaMedia menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

To select DVD single drive or data

medium: press a briefly, to open the list

of media sources.

Press : or 9 to select the correspond-

ing DVD single drive or disc.

Press a to confirm.

To open the scene list: press : or 9

briefly.

To select the next or previous scene in the

scene list: press : or 9 briefly.

To select a scene from the scene list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9

until desired scene : is reached.

Press a to confirm your selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

WARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal

requirements for the country in which you are

currently driving.

Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-

facturer’s operating instructions).

Switch on the multimedia system.

Establish a Bluetooth

connection to the mul-

timedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the main menu.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

You will see one of the following display mes-

sages in the multifunction display:

Phone READYPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found a net-

work and is ready to receive.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searching for

a network.

166

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐Tele‐

phonephone menu, a display message appears in the

multifunction display.

You can accept a call at any time, even if you are

not in the TelephoneTelephone menu.

Press the 6 button on the steering wheel

to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call

You can end or reject a call at any time even if

you are not in the TelephoneTelephone menu.

Press the ~ button on the steering wheel

to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the :, 9 or a button to

switch to the phone book.

Press : or 9 to select the names one

after the other.

To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :

or 9 for longer than one second.

The names in the phone book are displayed

quickly one after the other.

If you press and hold the : or 9 button

for longer than five seconds, the name

appears with the next or previous letter initial

letter in the alphabet.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the

button or reach the end of the list.

If only one telephone number is stored for

a name: press the 6 or a button to

start dialing.

If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or a

button to display the numbers.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

number you want to dial.

Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

To exit the phone book: press the ~ or

% button.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names or

numbers dialed in the redial memory.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the 6 button to switch to the redial

memory.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

desired name or number.

Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

To exit the redial memory: press the ~

or % button.

Assistance graphic menu

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic

menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

The multifunction display shows the Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC distance display

on the assistance graphic.

The assistance graphic displays the status of

and information from the following driving

systems or driving safety systems:

Menus and submenus

167

On-board computer and displays

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(Y page 136)

Distance warning function of Active Brake

Assist (Y page 59)

Blind Spot Assist (Y page 155)

ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 154)

Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 157)

Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST

assessment.

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

ServiceService menu:

calling up display messages in message mem-

ory (Y page 174)

checking the tire pressure electronically

(Y page 270).

calling up the service due date (Y page 241).

checking the engine oil level using the on-

board computer (Y page 237).

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

SettingsSettings menu:

changing assistance settings (Y page 168).

changing the light settings (Y page 169).

changing the instrument cluster settings

(Y page 169).

restoring the factory settings (Y page 170).

Assistance submenu

Activating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐

sistsist submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Press 9 or : to select BrakeBrake AssistAssist.

Press a to confirm.

The current selection appears.

To activate/deactivate: press the a but-

ton again.

When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the

æ symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistance

GraphicGraphic menu of the multifunction display.

Further information on Active Brake Assist

(Y page 59).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐

sistsist submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Press : or 9 to select Blind SpotBlind Spot

AssistAssist.

Press a to confirm.

The current selection appears.

To activate/deactivate: press the a but-

ton again.

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray

radar waves propagating backwards appear

next to the vehicle in the AssistanceAssistance

GraphicGraphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,

see (Y page 155).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐

sistsist submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Select Attention AssistAttention Assist with : or

Press a to confirm.

168

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Press : or 9 to select OffOff, StandardStandard

or SensitiveSensitive.

Press a to confirm the selection.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

é symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistance

GraphicGraphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTION

ASSIST, see (Y page 154).

Setting Lane Keeping Assist

Press the ò button on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐

sistsist submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Press : or 9 to select LaneLane KeepingKeeping

AssistAssist.

Press a to confirm.

Press : or 9 to select OffOff, StandardStandard

or AdaptiveAdaptive.

To change the setting: press a again.

Further information about Lane Keeping Assist

(Y page 157).

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/

off

This function is not available in Canada.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the LightsLights

submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Using : or 9, select the DaytimeDaytime

Running LightsRunning Lights function.

If the DaytimeDaytime RunningRunning LightsLights function has

been switched on, the cone of light and the

W symbol in the multifunction display are

shown in white.

Press the a button to save the setting.

Further information about Daytime RunningDaytime Running

LightsLights(Y page 96).

Instrument cluster submenu

Setting the brightness for the display and

switches

You can use the BrightnessBrightness function to set the

brightness of the multifunction display and the

switches in the vehicle in increments.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐Instru‐

ment Clusterment Cluster submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Press : or 9 to select the BrightnessBrightness

function.

Press a to confirm.

You can see the selected setting LevelLevel with a

value between 0 and 10. Level 0 corresponds

to a dim light and level 10 corresponds to a

bright light.

Press : or 9 to change the brightness.

The brightness is set simultaneously with the

selection.

Press a or % to save the setting.

Selecting the distance unit

The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-

tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-

plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-

tifunction display.

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Press the : or 9 button to select the

Display Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.

You will see the selected setting: kmkm or MilesMiles.

Press the a button to save the setting.

Menus and submenus

169

On-board computer and displays

The selected unit of measurement for distance

applies to:

Digital speedometer in the TripTrip menu

Odometer and the trip odometer

Trip computer

Range

Navigation instructions in the NaviNavi menu

Cruise control

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer

on/off

If the additional speedometer is switched on,

the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-

tifunction display instead of the outside tem-

perature.

The additional speedometer displays the speed

in the respective unit that is not shown in the

multifunction display.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

main menu.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐Instru‐

ment Clusterment Cluster submenu.

Press a to confirm.

Press : or 9 to select the Addi‐Addi‐

tional Speedometer [km/h]tional Speedometer [km/h] function.

The current selection appears.

To switch on/off: press a again.

Restoring the factory settings

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the SettingsSettings menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select the FactoryFactory

SettingsSettings submenu.

Press a to confirm.

The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? function

appears.

Press : or 9 to select NoNo or YesYes.

Press a to confirm the selection.

If you have selected YesYes, the multifunction

display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime Running

LightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu is only

reset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu

Warm-up

Digital speedometer

;

Gear indicator

Charge-air pressure

Engine oil temperature

Transmission oil temperature

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Engine and transmission oil tempera-

tures: when the engine and transmission are

at normal operating temperature, oil temper-

atures ? and A are displayed in white in the

multifunction display.

If the multifunction display shows oil temper-

ature ? or A in blue, the engine or the

transmission are not yet at normal operating

temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-

put during this time.

170

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

G-Meter

The G-Meter shows you the forces that are exer-

ted on the driver during the journey, both later-

ally and in the direction of travel.

The maximum values are indicated in red in the

guideline system.

Press ò on the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the 9 button repeatedly until the G-

Meter appears.

The maximum values of the G-Meter are

saved.

To reset the G-Meter: press a again.

Using : or 9 select YesYes on the steer-

ing wheel.

Press a to confirm.

The maximum values of the G-Meter are

deleted.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer

than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-

cally reset.

SETUP

Drive ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +/ RaceRace

;

Suspension ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +

Transmission DD/MM

Exhaust system ComfortComfort/Sport +Sport +

ESP

OnOn/OffOff or SPORT handling mode

SportSport

SETUP displays the following information and

functions:

the gear indicator

the digital speedometer

the drive system setting

the suspension mode

the transmission position

the exhaust flap position

the ESP

(Electronic Stability Program) status

Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the list of menus.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to

select the AMGAMG menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP is dis-

played.

Further information on the upshift indicator and

gear indicator (Y page 123).

Menus and submenus

171

On-board computer and displays

RACE TIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

Lap

;

RACETIMER

The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a

closed race circuit. Do not use the function on

public roads.

You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is

running or if the key is in position 2 in the igni-

tion lock.

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press the : or 9 button repeatedly

until the RACETIMER is shown.

To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Starting a new lap

Lap

;

RACETIMER

Quickest lap time

Press the : or 9 button to select NewNew

LapLap.

Press a to confirm.

A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.

Stopping the RACETIMER

Press the : or 9 button to select StopStop.

Press a to confirm.

If you stop the vehicle and select key position

1, the RACETIMER interrupts timing. If you

select key position 3 with the Start/Stop but-

ton and then press a StartStart to confirm, tim-

ing is continued.

Continuing the RACETIMER

Press the : or 9 button to select Con‐Con‐

tinuetinue.

Press a to confirm.

172

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Resetting the RACETIMER

Press the : or 9 button to select StopStop.

The RACETIMER is stopped.

Press the : or 9 button to select

ResetReset.

Press a to confirm.

All laps are deleted.

Lap statistics

Lap

;

Lap time

Average lap speed

Lap length

This function is only available if you have stored

at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-

TIMER.

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering

wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering

wheel.

Press : or 9 to select Lap ListLap List.

Press a to confirm.

The lap statistics are displayed.

Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-

ferent lap evaluation.

The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-

bol :.

Display messages

Introduction

General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual

and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.

Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this

Operator's Manual.

With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.

You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.

Display messages

173

On-board computer and displays

When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

HOLD function (Y page 144)

Parking (Y page 127)

Hiding display messages

Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.

The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority

display messages cannot be hidden.

The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages

have been remedied.

Message memory

The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up

the display messages:

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.

Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory.

If there are no display messages, the No MessagesNo Messages display appears in the multifunction display

If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.

Press a to confirm.

Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages.

174

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Safety systems

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!÷

Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator'sble See Operator's

ManualManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP

(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) are temporarily not available.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-

ment cluster.

For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake

hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully.

Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above

are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷

Inoperative SeeInoperative See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP

are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warning

lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake

hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages

175

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Inoperative SeeInoperative See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP

is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus

increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator'sble See Operator's

ManualManual

ESP

is temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake

hard, for example.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus

increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above

are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

176

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

T !

Inoperative SeeInoperative See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP

are malfunc-

tioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-

ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock

if you brake hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Brake ImmediatelyBrake Immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC was activated.

A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the

vehicle, the tone becomes louder.

You cannot start the engine.

Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

F (USA

only) ! (Canada

only)

Turn On the Igni‐Turn On the Igni‐

tiontion toto ReleaseRelease thethe

Parking BrakeParking Brake

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights

up.

You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition

was switched off.

Switch on the ignition.

F (USA

only) ! (Canada

only)

PleasePlease ReleaseRelease Park‐Park‐

ing Brakeing Brake

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the

electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 130).

You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.

Release the electric parking brake manually.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and a warning tone sounds.

You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking

(Y page 129).

Display messages

177

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

F (USA

only) ! (Canada

only)

Parking Brake SeeParking Brake See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

Switch the ignition off.

Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

Release the electric parking brake manually.

Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

Do not drive on.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

Release the electric parking brake manually.

To apply:

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-

tinues to flash:

Do not drive on.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 282).

Shift the transmission to position j.

Turn the front wheels towards the curb.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

178

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)

or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds

after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then

goes out or remains lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Shift the transmission to position j.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply

the electric parking brake manually.

Shift the transmission to position j as the electric parking brake is

not applied automatically.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130).

F (USA

only) ! (Canada

only)

Parking Brake Inop‐Parking Brake Inop‐

erativeerative

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)

or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds

after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then

goes out or remains lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-

voltage or undervoltage.

Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by

charging the battery or restarting the engine.

Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

179

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)

or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only)

Check Brake FluidCheck Brake Fluid

LevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp

lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving

under any circumstances.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

CheckCheck BrakeBrake PadPad WearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

USA only: the red $ brake system warning lamp also lights up while

the engine is running.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

InoperativeInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

MercedesMercedes meme connectconnect

Services LimitedServices Limited

See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐

ualual

Service limited.

Malfunction of one or more main functions of the Mercedes me con-

nect system.

Observe the notes on diagnostics connection (Y page 27).

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

180

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ActiveActive BrakeBrake AssistAssist

FunctionsFunctions CurrentlyCurrently

Limited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐

tor's Manualtor's Manual

Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes are:

the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-

tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or

other sources of electromagnetic radiation

the system is outside the operating temperature range

the on-board voltage is too low

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message

disappears.

Active Brake Assist is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Restart the engine.

ActiveActive BrakeBrake AssistAssist

Functions LimitedFunctions Limited

See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐

ualual

Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. The situation-

dependent brake boosting effect may also have failed.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐PRE-SAFE Inopera‐

tivetive SeeSee Operator'sOperator's

ManualManual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE

have failed. All other occupant

safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages

181

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

RadarRadar SensorsSensors DirtyDirty

See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐

ualual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems

is temporarily restricted or inoperative:

Active Brake Assist

Possible causes are:

the sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty

the function of the driving system or driving safety system is

impaired due to heavy rain or snow

A warning tone also sounds.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message

disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operative

again.

If the display message does not disappear:

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Switch off the engine.

Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 246):

in the radiator trim

in the front bumper

in the rear bumper, particularly in the center of the rear bumper

Restart the engine.

The display message disappears.

SRSSRS MalfunctionMalfunction Ser‐Ser‐

vice Requiredvice Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up in the instrument cluster.

WARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered

unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

Front Left Malfunc‐Front Left Malfunc‐

tion Servicetion Service

RequiredRequired or FrontFront

Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction

Service RequiredService Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

WARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered

unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

182

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Left Side CurtainLeft Side Curtain

Airbag MalfunctionAirbag Malfunction

Service RequiredService Required or

Right Side CurtainRight Side Curtain

Airbag MalfunctionAirbag Malfunction

Service RequiredService Required

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

WARNING

The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-

tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.

There is an increased risk of injury.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages

183

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

FrontFront PassengerPassenger Air‐Air‐

bag Disabled Seebag Disabled See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

The front passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,

although:

an adult

a person of the corresponding stature is on the front passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret

the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

WARNING

The front passenger front air bag does not deploy during an accident.

There is an increased risk of injury.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Switch the ignition off.

Have the occupant on the front passenger seat get out of the vehi-

cle.

Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and

switch on the ignition.

Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center

console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-

neously for approximately six seconds

the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up

and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,

OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front

passenger front air bag (Y page 48)

the display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledFront Passenger Airbag Enabled

See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐

abled See Operator's Manualabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-

function display

Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system

checks have been completed.

Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-

function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front passenger seat can be occu-

pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

(Y page 48).

184

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

FrontFront PassengerPassenger Air‐Air‐

bag Enabled Seebag Enabled See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

The front passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag are

enabled during the journey, although:

a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's

weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat

the front passenger seat is unoccupied

The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on

the seat.

WARNING

The front passenger front air bag and the front passenger knee bag

may be deployed unintentionally.

There is an increased risk of injury.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Switch the ignition off.

Open the front passenger door.

Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front

passenger seat.

Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the

weight.

The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-

pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and

switch on the ignition.

Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center

console and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-

neously for approximately six seconds

the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up

and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,

OCS has disabled the front passenger front air bag and front

passenger knee bag (Y page 48)

the display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledFront Passenger Airbag Enabled

See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐

abled See Operator's Manualabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-

function display

Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system

checks have been completed.

Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-

function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front passenger seat can be occu-

pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator

lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-

pant.

Display messages

185

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see

(Y page 48).

Lights

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

CheckCheck LeftLeft LowLow BeamBeam

(example)

The corresponding bulb is faulty.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding

lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

Malfunction SeeMalfunction See

Operator’s ManualOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is faulty.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Automatic HeadlampAutomatic Headlamp

Mode InoperativeMode Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Switch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning

tone also sounds.

Turn the light switch to the Ã or L position.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam

Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam

Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently

Unavailable SeeUnavailable See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes are:

the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty

visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog

Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the Adap‐Adap‐

tivetive HighbeamHighbeam AssistAssist NowNow AvailableAvailable display message is shown.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

186

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Engine

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

CheckCheck CoolantCoolant LevelLevel

See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐

ualual

The coolant level is too low.

Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient coolant in the

engine cooling system. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so

(Y page 239).

If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine

coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The fan motor is faulty.

At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the nearest

qualified specialist workshop.

Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-

tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Coolant Too HotCoolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle Turn

Engine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some

fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch

fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which

can occur just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Wait until the engine has cooled down.

Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,

e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and

the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the

engine could be damaged.

Pay attention to the coolant temperature gage.

If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-

shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant

level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Display messages

187

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐

ualual

The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.

Possible causes are:

a defective alternator

a torn poly-V-belt

a malfunction in the electronics

Do not drive any further. Otherwise the engine may overheat.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is

too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual

display message.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Start Engine SeeStart Engine See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

The engine is off and the battery condition of charge is too low.

Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster and interior lighting.

Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance.

The battery is being charged.

Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil

Level (Add 1 quart)Level (Add 1 quart)

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You

could otherwise damage the engine.

Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 236).

If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 238).

Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine

oil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified

specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com.

Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level

Low Stop VehicleLow Stop Vehicle

Turn Engine OffTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Check the engine oil level (Y page 236).

If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 238).

188

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Engine Oil ReduceEngine Oil Reduce

Oil LevelOil Level

You have added too much engine oil. The engine or catalytic converter

may be damaged.

Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level. Observe

the legal requirements.

Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level

Cannot Be MeasuredCannot Be Measured

The measuring system is faulty.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel at the nearest gas station.

There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST:ATTENTION ASSIST:

Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also

sounds.

If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get

enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST

InoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

MalfunctionMalfunction

There is a malfunction in the chassis. The vehicle's handling charac-

teristics may be affected.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

189

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

LaneLane KeepingKeeping AssistAssist

Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator'sble See Operator's

ManualManual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes are:

the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty

visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog

there have been no lane markings for an extended period

the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or

snow

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message

disappears.

Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Clean the windshield.

LaneLane KeepingKeeping AssistAssist

InoperativeInoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is defective.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist

Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator'sble See Operator's

ManualManual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes are:

the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range

the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-

tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or

other sources of electromagnetic radiation

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message

disappears.

Blind Spot Assist is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist

InoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

OffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

A warning tone also sounds.

Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 145).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.

A warning tone also sounds.

Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function

(Y page 145).

190

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Active DistanceActive Distance

Assist OffAssist Off

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated (Y page 136).

If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

Active DistanceActive Distance

AssistAssist NowNow AvailableAvailable

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again after having

been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 136).

Active DistanceActive Distance

Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently

Unavailable SeeUnavailable See

Operator's ManualOperator's Manual

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes are:

the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-

tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or

other sources of electromagnetic radiation

the system is outside the operating temperature range

the on-board voltage is too low

A warning tone also sounds.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message

disappears.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Restart the engine.

Active DistanceActive Distance

Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is defective.

A warning tone also sounds.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active DistanceActive Distance

Assist SuspendedAssist Suspended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Active DistanceActive Distance

Assist - - - mphAssist - - - mph

A condition for activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not

been met.

Check the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC (Y page 136).

CruiseCruise ControlControl Inop‐Inop‐

erativeerative

Cruise control is malfunctioning.

A warning tone also sounds.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

191

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Cruise ControlCruise Control

- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.

You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-

ple

ESP

is deactivated. The yellow ESP

OFF warning lamp is lit.

If conditions permit, drive at a speed faster than 20 mph (30 km/h)

and store the speed.

Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 134).

Reactivate ESP

(Y page 62).

Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off

Cruise control has been deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-

matically (Y page 134).

Tires

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

PleasePlease CorrectCorrect TireTire

PressurePressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire

pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 269).

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 271).

Check TiresCheck Tires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The

wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:

they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.

the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be

greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat

tire (Y page 250).

Check the tire pressure (Y page 269).

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

192

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐

functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel

position is shown in the multifunction display.

WARNING

Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:

a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle

you could lose control of the vehicle

continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up

and possibly a fire

There is a risk of an accident.

Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat

tire (Y page 250).

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitor

Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐

bleble

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no

signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure

monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.

Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the

problem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐

sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires.

The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction

display.

Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-

ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor Inoperative Notor Inoperative No

Wheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The

tire pressure monitor is deactivated.

Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for

a few minutes.

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitor

InoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

193

On-board computer and displays

Vehicle

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'

to Start Engineto Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-

tion k or h.

Shift the selector lever to j or i.

Apply Brake toApply Brake to

Shift from 'P'Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to shift the selector lever to position h, k or i

without applying the brakes.

Depress the brake pedal.

ToTo DeselectDeselect PP oror N,N,

Depress Brake andDepress Brake and

Start EngineStart Engine

With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the selector

lever out of position j or i into another transmission position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Start the engine.

To Engage Trans‐To Engage Trans‐

miss. Position Rmiss. Position R

First Depress theFirst Depress the

BrakeBrake

You have attempted to shift from position h to position k without

applying the brakes.

Depress the brake pedal.

Shift the transmission to position k.

Driver's Door OpenDriver's Door Open

& Transmission Not& Transmission Not

in P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐

cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in

position k, i or h.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

The vehicle may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'

whenwhen VehicleVehicle isis Sta‐Sta‐

tionarytionary

The vehicle is moving.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Shift the transmission to position j.

ServiceService RequiredRequired DoDo

Not Shift GearsNot Shift Gears

Visit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.

A warning tone also sounds.

If transmission position h is selected:

Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-

mission from position h.

If position k, i or j is selected:

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 282).

Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

194

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ReversingReversing NotNot Possi‐Possi‐

bleble ServiceService RequiredRequired

The sub-transmission with the even gears has failed. You can no longer

engage reverse gear. The smoothness of the gear change is restricted.

The transmission is in emergency mode.

A warning tone also sounds.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐

function Stopfunction Stop

A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-

nents.

A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to

position i.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Shift the selector lever to position j.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Depress Brake toDepress Brake to

Start EngineStart Engine

You cannot start the engine. The engine has been switched off in h or

Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'

whenwhen VehicleVehicle isis Sta‐Sta‐

tionarytionary

The vehicle is moving.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Parking Lock Mal‐Parking Lock Mal‐

funct. Apply Park‐funct. Apply Park‐

ing Brakeing Brake

The transmission position j cannot be selected.

Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it

(Y page 282).

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission OilTransmission Oil

Cooling MalfunctionCooling Malfunction

The transmission coolant pump is faulty. The transmission may over-

heat.

In the on-board computer, select the AMGAMG menu and check the

transmission oil temperature (Y page 170).

Avoid excessive loading, e.g. due to dynamic driving.

If the transmission oil temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C), drive

on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Trans. Oil Overhea‐Trans. Oil Overhea‐

ted Drive on withted Drive on with

CareCare

The transmission oil has overheated.

Manual mode M and temporary manual drive program are no longer

available. Only the Comfort drive program is available for the trans-

mission. The engine output is reduced according to the degree of

overheating.

Allow the transmission oil to cool by adopting a defensive driving

style.

Display messages

195

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Electronic RearElectronic Rear

Axle DifferentialAxle Differential

Lock InoperativeLock Inoperative

The electronic rear axle differential lock is inoperative.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Electronic RearElectronic Rear

Axle DifferentialAxle Differential

Lock CurrentlyLock Currently

UnavailableUnavailable

The electronic rear axle differential lock motor has overheated.

Allow electronic rear axle differential lock to cool by adopting a

defensive driving style.

The trunk lid is open.

WARNING

When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-

rior if the trunk lid is open.

There is a risk of poisoning.

Close the trunk lid.

The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.

There is a risk of an accident.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Close the hood.

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

Close all the doors.

Rear Spoiler Con‐Rear Spoiler Con‐

trol System Inoper‐trol System Inoper‐

ativeative

The rear spoiler cannot be fully retracted and may extend again.

If the retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:

Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.

Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.

Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.

The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

196

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

RearRear SpoilerSpoiler Inoper‐Inoper‐

ative Limit 125 mphative Limit 125 mph

The rear spoiler cannot be fully extended and extends as far as pos-

sible.

The speed of the vehicle is limited to 125 mph (200 km/h).

If the extension/retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:

Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.

Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.

Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.

The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Power Steering Mal‐Power Steering Mal‐

function See Opera‐function See Opera‐

tor's Manualtor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified

specialist workshop.

If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service

Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.

Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears

in the multifunction display.

Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below

the minimum.

Add washer fluid (Y page 240).

SmartKey

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

KeyKey DoesDoes NotNot BelongBelong

to Vehicleto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Use the correct SmartKey.

Take Your Key fromTake Your Key from

IgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

Remove the SmartKey.

Display messages

197

On-board computer and displays

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key BatteryReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.

Change the batteries (Y page 69).

Don't Forget YourDon't Forget Your

KeyKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's

door with the engine switched off.

This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is

simply a reminder.

Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected

(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.

Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired

position.

Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected

(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.

If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-

trally or start the engine.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Locate the SmartKey.

Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.

A warning tone also sounds.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey

mode.

Insert KeyInsert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is

faulty. A warning tone also sounds.

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired

position.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

198

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Warning and indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster

General notes

Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when

the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some

indicator and warning lamps may light up or

flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.

These indicator and warning lamps only indicate

a malfunction if they light up or flash after start-

ing the engine or whilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their

seat belts.

Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a

warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

The warning tone ceases.

N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the

driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.

Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure

place.

The warning lamp goes out.

N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning

sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph

(25 km/h).

Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster

than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).

Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure

place.

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

199

On-board computer and displays

Safety systems

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit

while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be

affected.

There is a risk of an accident.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit

while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol.

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

200

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.

If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed

above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-

ple.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking

distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If the ABS control unit is defective, there is also a possibility that other systems,

such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

÷å

N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow

ESP

and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

ABS and ESP

are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed

above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-

ple.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking

distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

201

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The yellow ESP

warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

ESP

or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at

least one wheel has started to spin.

Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.

Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

Do not deactivate ESP

In rare cases (Y page 62), it may be best to deactivate ESP

Observe the important safety notes on ESP

(Y page 62).

N The yellow ESP

warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ESP

is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed

above.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

If ESP

is not operational, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Drive on carefully.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

N The yellow ESP

OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO

start/stop function is activated.

ESP

is deactivated.

WARNING

If ESP

is switched off, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Reactivate ESP

In rare cases (Y page 62), it may be best to deactivate ESP

Observe the important safety notes on ESP

(Y page 62).

Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP

cannot be activated:

Drive on carefully.

Have ESP

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

202

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP

is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-

bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 62).

N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric

parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric

parking brake is lit.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The restraint system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-

tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.

There is an increased risk of injury.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Drive on carefully.

Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

203

On-board computer and displays

Engine

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

;

N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:

in the engine management

in the fuel injection system

in the exhaust system

in the ignition system

in the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency

mode.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon

as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-

ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations

apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel at the nearest gas station.

N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the

coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine

damage if the coolant temperature is too high.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

204

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or

the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.

Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(Y page 239).

If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant sys-

tem checked.

Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,

slush or ice.

Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡

(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,

and stop-and-go traffic.

N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning

tone also sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡(120 †). The airflow to the engine

radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

WARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which

may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur

just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.

Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(Y page 239).

If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant sys-

tem checked.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

205

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,

slush or ice.

At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.

Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,

and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning

tone also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too

high a speed.

Be prepared to brake immediately.

Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take

evasive action.

Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist

(Y page 59).

206

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Tires

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

WARNING

Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:

they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-

tion.

the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly

impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay

attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 127).

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire

(Y page 250).

Check the tire pressure (Y page 269).

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

WARNING

The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.

There is a risk of an accident.

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

207

On-board computer and displays

Vehicle

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NN Signal type

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The power steering is malfunctioning.

A warning tone also sounds.

WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist work-

shop.

If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.

208

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera-

tor's Manual describes the basic principles for

operation. More information can be found in the

Digital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when

operating the multimedia system.

The multimedia system calculates the route to

the destination without taking the following into

account, for example:

traffic lights

stop and yield signs

parking or stopping restrictions

road narrowing

other road and traffic rules and regulations

The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-

igation recommendations if the actual street/

traffic situation does not correspond with the

digital map's data.

For example:

a diverted route

the road layout or the direction of a one-way

street has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe road

and traffic rules and regulations during your

journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations

always have priority over multimedia system

driving recommendations.

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your

attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-

sulting the map display for directions. Looking

at the icons or map display can distract you from

traffic conditions and driving, and increase the

risk of an accident.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-

ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.

This equipment has very low levels of RF energy

that is deemed to comply without maximum

permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-

ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance

of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the

radiation source and a person's body (not

including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and

legs).

WARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their

software as well as wiring can impair their

function and/or the function of other net-

worked components. In particular, systems

relevant to safety could also be affected. As a

result, these may no longer function as inten-

ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of

the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an

accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-

tronic components or their software. You

should have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-

ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.

You will notice this, for example, because either

you will not be able to select certain menu items

or a message will appear to this effect.

Function restrictions

209

Multimedia system

Operating system

Overview

General notes

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your

ability to read the display.

The display has an automatic temperature-con-

trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is

automatically reduced if the temperature is too

high. The display may temporarily switch off

completely.

Cleaning instructions

Do not touch the display. The display has a

very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a

risk of scratching. If you have to clean the

screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent

and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have

cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not

apply pressure to the display surface when

cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-

age to the display.

Switching the multimedia system

on/off

Press the Ä control knob which is located

on the center console to the right of the con-

troller.

Adjusts the volume

Turn the Ä control knob which is located

on the center console to the right of the con-

troller.

The volume is adjusted:

for the currently selected media source

during traffic or navigation announcements

in hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or off

Press the 8 button on the multifunction

steering wheel.

If the audio output is switched off, the status

line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch

the media source or change the volume, the

sound is automatically switched on.

You will hear navigation messages even

when the sound is muted (COMAND).

Functions

The multimedia system has the following func-

tions:

Radio mode

Media mode with media search

Sound system

Navigation system (COMAND):

Communication functions

SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)

Vehicle functions with system settings

Favorites functions

Controller

The controller in the center console lets you:

select menu items on the display

enter characters

select a destination on the map

save entries

The controller can be:

turned 3

slid left or right 1

slid forwards or back 4

slid diagonally 2

pressed briefly or pressed and held 7

Back button

You can use the % button to exit a menu or to

call up the display of the current operating

mode.

To exit the menu: briefly press the %

button.

The multimedia system changes to the next

higher menu level in the current operating

mode.

To call up the highest level menu: press the

% button for longer than two seconds.

210

Operating system

Multimedia system

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/off

Multimedia system:

Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐

tingstingsQTouchpadTouchpadQActivate Touch‐Activate Touch‐

padpad.

The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.

Operating the touchpad

Touch-sensitive surface

;

Favorites button

Calls up quick access for audio

Back button

Navigating in menus and lists can be done via

touch-sensitive surface : by swiping with

your finger.

To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to

the left or right.

Press the touchpad.

To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-

tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-

tion:

To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up

or down with two fingers.

To increase or reduce the vehicle and

sound settings: turn two fingers to the right

or left.

To zoom in and out of the map (COMAND):

move two fingers together or apart.

Character entry with handwriting rec-

ognition

Entering characters

Use one finger to write characters on the sur-

face.

The character is entered in the input line. If

the character that you have entered can be

interpreted in different ways, these character

suggestions are displayed.

If character suggestions are shown, turn and

press the controller.

Resume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

Example: COMAND

Active input line

;

Inserts a space

Character entered on the touchpad

Deletes characters

To display the menu: press the touchpad.

Example: COMAND

To exit the menu

;

To return to handwriting recognition

To use the phone book or text templates

To select the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursor

Operating system

211

Multimedia system

To switch the language

To finish character entry

To select the input line: select p.

Swipe up or down.

To move the cursor within the input line:

select p.

Swipe to the left or right.

To delete characters: swipe to the left if an

input line is selected.

To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of the

handwriting recognition on/off

Multimedia system:

Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐

tingstingsQTouchpadTouchpadQRead Out Hand‐Read Out Hand‐

writing Recognitionwriting Recognition.

The read-aloud function is switched on O or

off ª.

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currently

activated, you can use this function to select the

next station or music track.

Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-

pad.

The current audio source is displayed.

To select the previous or next station/

music track: glide to the right or left.

The selected station/music track is played.

Switching the character entry between

touchpad and controller

Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or

characters has been selected.

To switch to the controller: press the con-

troller.

Character entry using the controller is active.

To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-

pad with your finger.

Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is

active.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favorites

To call up: press the ß button on the con-

troller or on the touchpad.

Select a favorite, e.g. VehicleVehicle.

The favorites are displayed.

To exit: press the ß button again.

Adding favorites

Adding predefined favorites

Example: favorites arranged in one row

Adds a new favorite

;

Renames a selected favorite

Moves a selected favorite

Deletes a selected favorite

Press the ß button.

The favorites are displayed.

Slide 6 the controller.

The menu bar is shown.

Select ReassignReassign.

The categories are displayed.

Select a category.

The favorites are displayed.

Select a favorite.

Add a favorite at the desired position.

If a favorite has already been added at this

position, it will be overwritten.

212

Operating system

Multimedia system

Adding your own favorites

Select VehicleVehicleQClimate ControlClimate Control.

Press and hold the ß button until the

favorites are displayed.

Add a favorite at the desired position.

If a favorite has already been added at this

position, it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notes

You can adjust the climate control settings

using the climate control bar or the climate con-

trol menu.

Important climate control functions can be set

in the climate control bar:

Temperature

Airflow

Air distribution

The climate control bar is visible in most dis-

plays.

You can find all available climate control func-

tions in the climate control menu. You can use

the climate control bar to switch to the climate

control menu.

Overview

Climate control bar (COMAND)

Adjusts temperature, air distribution, dis-

plays the current settings

;

Calls up the climate control menu, displays

the current cooling and climate mode set-

tings

Adjusts airflow and temperature, displays

the current settings

There may be fewer settings or none depending

on your vehicle's equipment.

Calling up the climate control bar

Multimedia system:

Select VehicleVehicle.

The vehicle menu is displayed.

Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the

climate control bar is activated.

Calling up the climate control menu

Multimedia system:

Select VehicleVehicle.

The vehicle menu is displayed.

Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the

climate control bar is activated.

To select from climate control bar ;: turn

and press the controller.

The menu for selecting the climate control

function is activated.

To select the climate control function: turn

and press the controller.

The selected climate control function

appears.

Settings in the climate menu

Adjusting the climate mode settings

The climate mode determines the type of air-

flow. The setting is active when the air-condi-

tioning system is set to Ã (Y page 105).

Call up the climate control menu

(Y page 213).

To select Climate ModeClimate Mode: turn and press the

controller.

To change the setting: turn the controller.

To exit the menu: press the % button.

The climate mode bar displays the current air-

flow setting: DIFFUSEDIFFUSE, MEDIUMMEDIUM or FOCUSFOCUS.

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-

mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion on/off

Call up the climate control menu

(Y page 213).

Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the

bottom bar is activated.

Operating system

213

Multimedia system

To select OO A/CA/C: turn and press the control-

ler.

Switch cooling with air dehumidification on

O or off ª.

The current status of the cooling function is

displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON

– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.

Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-

fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set-

tings

Use OO SyncSync (synchronization) to select the cli-

mate control setting for all zones together O or

separately ª.

Call up the climate control menu

(Y page 213).

Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the

bottom bar is activated.

To select OO SyncSync: turn and press the con-

troller.

Switch the synchronization function on O or

off ª.

For further information on synchronizing climate

control settings, see (Y page 106).

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when

operating the navigation system.

General notes

Among other things, correct functioning of the

navigation system depends on GPS reception. In

certain situations, GPS reception may be

impaired, there may be interference or there

may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or

parking garages.

The following descriptions apply to navigation

with COMAND. Further information can be

found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route options

Multimedia system:

Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.

Select ZQRoute SettingsRoute Settings.

If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the

controller and show the menu.

Select a route type.

Notes for route types:

Eco RouteEco Route

Calculates an economic route.

Dynamic Traffic RouteDynamic Traffic Route (only available in

the USA)

Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-

ance are taken into account.

Calculate Alternative RoutesCalculate Alternative Routes

Different routes are being calculated. Instead

of StartStart, select the ContinueContinue menu item.

To avoid/use route options: select AvoidAvoid

OptionsOptions.

Select a route option.

Notes for route options:

Use Toll RoadsUse Toll Roads

The route calculation includes roads which

require you to pay a usage fee (toll).

Use Carpool LanesUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the

USA)

Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access

conditions for carpool lanes.

Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool

lanes option is activated.

Entering an address

Multimedia system:

Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.

Select DestinationDestinationQAddress EntryAddress Entry.

214

Operating system

Multimedia system

If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the

controller and show the menu.

Examples for entering an address are:

City or ZIP code, street, house number

Country, city or ZIP code

City or ZIP code, center

Street, city or ZIP code, intersection

Select CityCity.

The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-

ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.

Below this, you will see locations for which

route guidance has already been carried out.

Enter the city.

The G symbol: the location is contained on

the digital map multiple times.

To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-

ler.

Select the location.

If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are

different ZIP codes available for the location,

the corresponding digits are displayed with an

XX.

Enter the street and house number.

The address is in the menu.

You can use additional options for entering

the destination:

Keyword search

The keyword search finds destinations using

fragments of words.

Select the last destination

Select a contact

Select a POI

You can search for a POI by location, name or

telephone number.

Select destination on the map

Enter intermediate destination

You can map the route to the destination

yourself with up to four intermediate destina-

tions.

Select destinations from Mercedes-Benz

Apps

Select geo-coordinates

Calculating the route

Prerequisite: the address has been entered and

is in the menu.

Select StartStart or ContinueContinue.

The route is calculated with the selected route

type and the selected route options.

If route guidance has already been activated,

a prompt will appear asking whether you wish

to end the current route guidance.

Select YesYes or Set as Intermediate Des‐Set as Intermediate Des‐

tinationtination.

YesYes cancels the current route guidance and

starts route calculation to the new destina-

tion.

Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination adds

the new destination in addition to the existing

destination and opens the intermediate des-

tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

(COMAND)

Requirements

For telephony via the Bluetooth

interface, you

require at least one Bluetooth

-capable mobile

phone depending on use of one-telephone

mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile

phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or

above.

In two-telephone mode you can use all the

functions of the multimedia system with the

main telephone. With the additional tele-

phone, you can receive incoming calls.

Multimedia system:

Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐

tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.

Activate Bluetooth

Mobile phone:

Activate Bluetooth

and, if necessary, Blue-

tooth

visibility for other devices (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth

device names for all of one man-

ufacturer's products might be identical. To

make it possible to clearly identify your mobile

phone, change the device name (see the man-

ufacturer's operating instructions).

Operating system

215

Multimedia system

If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone

Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message

Access Profile) Bluetooth

profiles, the follow-

ing information will be transmitted after you

connect:

Phone book

Call lists

Messages

Further information on suitable mobile

phones can be obtained on the Internet at:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/

connect

In the USA, you can get in touch with the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-

tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobile

phone

Before using your mobile phone with the multi-

media system for the first time, you will need to

search for the phone and then authorize (con-

nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-

ization either takes place by means of Secure

Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The

multimedia system automatically makes the

procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone

available. The mobile phone is always connec-

ted automatically after authorization. Further

information on using a mobile phone with the

multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

If the multimedia system does not detect your

mobile phone, this may be due to particular

security settings on your mobile phone (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions).

Only one mobile phone can be connected to the

multimedia system at any one time.

Searching for a mobile phone

Multimedia system:

Select PhonePhoneQConnect DeviceConnect DeviceQCon‐Con‐

nect Another Devicenect Another Device.

One-telephone mode: select Main PhoneMain Phone.

Two-telephone mode: select AdditionalAdditional

Phone (Incoming Calls Only)Phone (Incoming Calls Only) when a

mobile phone is already connected.

Select Start SearchStart Search.

Select mobile phone.

Connecting a mobile phone

Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing

The code on the multimedia system and

mobile phone are the same: if applicable,

select YesYes on the multimedia system.

Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-

ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the

connection to the multimedia system and for

the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth

profiles. The

prompt to confirm may take up to two

minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-

er's operating instructions).

If the codes are different: select NoNo on the

multimedia system.

The process is canceled.

Repeat authorization.

Authorization via passkey entry (access code)

Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-

nation as a passkey.

Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.

Press ¬ to confirm.

Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile

phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,

confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-

tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth

profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up

to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-

ufacturer's operating instructions).

Media mode

General notes

If you wish to play external media sources, the

appropriate media mode must already be turned

on. Further information on media mode (see the

Digital Operator's Manual).

The following external media sources can be

used:

Apple

devices (e.g. iPhone

)

USB devices (e.g. USB flash drive, MP3

player)

CD/DVD (COMAND)

SD cards (COMAND)

Via devices connected by Bluetooth

Information on the single DVD drive (see the

Digital Operator's Manual).

216

Operating system

Multimedia system

Activating media mode

Multimedia system:

Select MediaMediaQDevicesDevices.

The available media sources will be shown.

Select the media source.

Playable files are played.

Inserting and removing the SD card

(COMAND)

Important safety notes

WARNING

SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-

lowed and cause choking. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.

If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-

tion immediately.

If the SD card is no longer in use, you should

take it out and remove it from the vehicle.

High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card

The SD card slot is located in the stowage com-

partment under the armrest.

Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until

the SD card engages. The side with the con-

tacts must face down.

Select the media source (Y page 217).

Removing an SD card

Press the SD card.

The SD card is ejected.

Remove the SD card.

Connecting USB devices

Example: COMAND

There are two USB ports in the stowage space

under the armrest.

Connect the USB device to the USB port.

Select the media source (Y page 217).

Operating system

217

Multimedia system

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

DANGER

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open while the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

WARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or

not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-

den change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be

flung around. Secure objects, luggage or

loads against slipping or tipping before the

journey.

WARNING

The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can

become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn

yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-

ing them.

This vehicle is not designed to transport any

items on the trunk lid or to allow luggage car-

riers or equipment of any kind to be installed

to the trunk lid. Otherwise the vehicle and the

retractable hardtop could be damaged.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle

are dependent on the distribution of the load

within the vehicle. For this reason, you should

observe the following notes when transporting a

load:

Never exceed the maximum permissible

gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight

rating for the vehicle (including occupants).

The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's

door.

The trunk is the preferred place to carry

objects.

Position heavy loads as far forwards as pos-

sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.

The load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests.

Secure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for

protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

WARNING

If objects in the passenger compartment are

stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be

thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces

and mobile phone brackets cannot always

retain all objects they contain. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sudden

braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.

Always make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or

stowage nets.

Close the lockable stowage spaces before

starting a journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in

the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 218).

218

Stowage areas

Stowage and features

Glove compartment

To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.

To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it

engages.

The glove box can be locked and unlocked using

the mechanical key.

To lock: insert the mechanical key into the

lock and turn it to key position 2.

To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the

lock and turn it to key position 1.

Stowage compartment in front of the

armrest

To open: slide cover : forwards.

Stowage compartment under armrest

To open: press button :.

The stowage compartment opens from the

rear.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-

lowing may be in the stowage space:

a multimedia connector unit with an SD card

slot and two USB ports, for example, for use

with an iPod

, iPhone

or MP3 player (see the

Digital Operator's Manual).

The ignition lock for starting the engine with the

SmartKey is in the stowage compartment

(Y page 111).

Additional stowage space

Depending on the equipment, the following

additional stowage areas are available in the

vehicle:

open stowage compartments in the doors

stowage net in the front-passenger footwell

a net on the rear wall behind the driver's seat

provides stowage space for small objects

such as a reflective safety jacket

Reflective safety jackets can be stored in

the door stowage compartments.

Observe the safety guidelines for stowage

spaces (Y page 218).

Stowage areas

219

Stowage and features

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

WARNING

If objects in the passenger compartment are

stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be

thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces

and mobile phone brackets cannot always

retain all objects they contain. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sudden

braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.

Always make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or

stowage nets.

Close the lockable stowage spaces before

starting a journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in

the trunk.

Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The drinks

could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the center console

To open: slide cover : forward until it

engages.

The divider in the cup holder can be removed,

e.g. for inserting smaller drinks cans.

To remove: pull the divider up and remove it.

To install: re-insert the divider and push it

down until it engages.

You can remove the rubber mat of cup holder ;

to clean it. Clean with clear, lukewarm water

only.

Sun visors

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded

up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be

blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an

accident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded down

while driving.

Sun visor (variant 1)

Mirror light

;

Retainer

Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

Vanity mirror

Mirror cover

220

Features

Stowage and features

Sun visor (variant 2)

Mirror light

;

Retainer

Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket

Vanity mirror

Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is

clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has

been folded up.

Moving the sun visor

(sun visor variant 1 only)

Fold down the sun visor.

Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

Glare from the side

Fold down sun visor :.

Pull sun visor : out of bracket ;.

Swing sun visor : to the side.

Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.

Ashtray

The stowage space under the ashtray is not

heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in

the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is

properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage

space could be damaged.

You can place insert ? into the cup holder on

the left-hand or right-hand side.

Slide cover : forwards until it engages.

To open: lift up lid ;.

To close: press lid ; downwards.

To remove: pull ashtray = up and out of

insert ?.

To insert: place ashtray = into insert ?.

Remove insert ? to be able to use the entire

cup holder. Store removed insert ? and ashtray

= in a suitable place. Observe the loading

guidelines (Y page 218).

Features

221

Stowage and features

Cigarette lighter

WARNING

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot

heating element or the socket of the cigarette

lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:

the hot cigarette lighter falls

a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is

out of reach of children. Never leave children

unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on the

traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter

when road and traffic conditions permit.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To open: slide cover : forward until it

engages.

Press in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically

when the heating element is red-hot.

To close: briefly press cover : at the front.

12 V sockets

General notes

Select key position 1 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a

maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories

include such items as chargers for mobile

phones.

If you use the sockets for long periods when the

engine is switched off, the battery may dis-

charge.

An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-

board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-

board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-

ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there

is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the trunk

Lift up the cover of socket :.

mbrace

General notes

The mbrace system is only available in the USA.

A license agreement must be in place in order to

activate the mbrace service. Make sure that

your system is activated and operational. To

the steps mentioned are not carried out, the

system may not be activated.

If you have questions about the activation, con-

tact one of the following telephone hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372) or

1-866-990-9007

Shortly after successfully registering with the

mbrace service, a user ID and password will be

sent to you by mail. You can use this password

to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners

Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

222

Features

Stowage and features

The system is available if:

it has been activated and is operational

the corresponding mobile phone network is

available for transmitting data to the Cus-

tomer Center

a service subscription is available

Determining the location of the vehicle on a map

is only possible if:

GPS reception is available

the vehicle position can be forwarded to the

Customer Assistance Center

The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as

follows:

Press the W or X button on the multi-

function steering wheel.

Use the multimedia system volume control.

The system offers various services, e.g.:

Automatic and manual emergency call

Roadside Assistance call

Info call

You can find information and a description of all

available features under "Owners Online" at

http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-

tem carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been detected

if one of the following occurs:

The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not

come on during the system self-test.

The indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance call button does not light up dur-

ing self-diagnosis of the system.

The indicator lamp in the ï Info call button

does not light up during the system self-diag-

nosis.

The indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-

lowing buttons continues to light up red after

the system self-diagnosis:

SOS button

F Roadside Assistance call button

ï Info call button

The InoperativeInoperative or the Service NotService Not

ActivatedActivated message appears in the multi-

function display after the system self-diagno-

sis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,

the system may not operate as expected. In the

event of an emergency, help will have to be

summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearest author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the following

telephone assistance services:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

1-866-990-9007.

Emergency call

Important safety notes

WARNING

It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,

even if you have pressed the SOS button in an

emergency if:

you see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-

cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident

the vehicle is on a dangerous section of

road

the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be

seen by other road users, particularly when

dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-

lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.

Move to a safe location along with other vehi-

cle occupants. In such situations, secure the

vehicle in accordance with national regula-

tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notes

Observe the notes on system activation

(Y page 222).

The emergency call is triggered automatically if

an air bag is deployed or an Emergency Ten-

Features

223

Stowage and features

sioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an

automatically triggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-

ually.

As soon as the emergency call has been initi-

ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button

flashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call message

appears in the multifunction display.

The audio output is muted.

Once the connection has been made, the CallCall

ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunc-

tion display.

All important information on the emergency is

transmitted, for example:

Current location of the vehicle (as determined

by the GPS system)

Vehicle identification number

Information on the severity of the accident

Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-

ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-

lished between the Customer Assistance Center

and the vehicle occupants.

If the vehicle occupants respond, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

attempts to get more information on the

emergency.

If there is no response from the vehicle occu-

pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to

the vehicle.

If the relevant mobile phone network is not

available, no emergency call can be initiated.

The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes

continuously.

No voice connection can be established to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The CallCall FailedFailed message appears on the mul-

tifunction display and must be confirmed.

In this case, summon assistance by other

means.

Making an emergency call

To initiate an emergency call manually:

press cover : briefly to open.

Press and hold the SOS button for at least one

second ;.

The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes

until the emergency call is concluded.

Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

After the emergency call, close cover :.

If the mobile phone network is unavailable,

mbrace will not be able to make the emergency

call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after

pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if

mbrace has successfully made the emergency

call. In this case, always summon assistance by

other means.

Breakdown assistance button

To call: press Roadside Assistance but-

ton :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-

tomer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance

button : flashes while the call is active. The

Connecting CallConnecting Call message appears in the

224

Features

Stowage and features

multifunction display. The audio output is

muted.

If a connection can be established, the CallCall

ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunc-

tion display.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception

are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,

for example:

Current location of the vehicle

Vehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that a

call is active. During the call, you can change to

the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-

ton on the multimedia system, for example.

Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

and the vehicle occupants.

From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

can ascertain the nature of the problem

(Y page 228).

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-

ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-

nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle

to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz

Service Center.

You may be charged for services such as repair

work and/or towing.

You can find more information in the separate

mbrace manual.

The system has not been able to initiate a Road-

side Assistance call, if:

the F indicator lamp for the Roadside

Assistance call button is flashing continu-

ously.

no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center was estab-

lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-

work is not available, for example.

The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

To end a call: press the ~ button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

Press the corresponding multimedia system

button for ending a phone call.

Info call button

To call: press Info call button :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-

tomer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in Info call button :

flashes while the connection is being made.

The Connecting CallConnecting Call message appears in

the multifunction display. The audio output is

muted.

If a connection can be established, the CallCall

ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunc-

tion display.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception

are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,

for example:

Current location of the vehicle

Vehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that a

call is active. During the call, you can change to

the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-

ton on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

and the vehicle occupants.

You receive information about operating your

vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-

vice Center and about other products and serv-

ices from Mercedes-Benz.

You can find further information on the mbrace

system under "Owners Online" at

http://www.mbusa.com.

Features

225

Stowage and features

The system was unable to initiate an Info call if:

the indicator lamp in the ï Info call button

is flashing continuously.

no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center has been estab-

lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-

work is not available, for example.

The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

To end a call: press the ~ button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

Press the corresponding multimedia system

button for ending a phone call.

Call priority

When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside

Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can

still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call

will take priority and override all other active

calls.

The indicator lamp of the respective button

flashes until the call is ended.

An emergency call can only be terminated by the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:

the ~ button on the multifunction steering

wheel

the corresponding button in the multimedia

system to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system is

muted.

The mobile phone is no longer connected to the

multimedia system.

However, if you want to use your mobile phone,

do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in

a safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations gives you access to a

database with over 15 million points of interest

(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-

gation system in your vehicle. If you know the

destination, the address can be downloaded.

Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations

in the vicinity.

Furthermore, you can download routes with up

to four way points.

You are prompted to confirm route guidance to

the address entered.

SelectYesYes by turning 3 or sliding 1

the controller and confirm with 7.

The system calculates the route and subse-

quently starts the route guidance with the

address entered.

If you select NoNo the address can be stored in

the address book.

The destination download function is available

if:

the vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-

tem.

the relevant mobile phone network is availa-

ble and data transfer is possible.

Route Assistance

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package

and cannot be purchased separately.

You can use the Route Assistance function even

if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation

system.

Within the framework of this service, you receive

a professional and reliable form of navigation

support without having to leave your vehicle.

The customer service representative finds a

suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-

rent position and the desired destination. You

will then be guided live through the current route

section.

Search and Send

General notes

To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be

equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.

Additionally, an mbrace service subscription

must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a service for entering desti-

nations in the navigation system. A destination

address which is found on Google Maps

can be

transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's

navigation system.

226

Features

Stowage and features

Specifying and sending the destination

address

Go to the website http://maps.google.com

and enter a destination address into the entry

field.

To send the destination address to the e-

mail address of your mbrace account:

click on the corresponding button on the web-

site.

Example:

If you select "Send to vehicle" and then

"Mercedes-Benz", the destination address

will be sent to your vehicle.

When the "Send" dialog window appears:

Enter the e-mail address you specified when

setting up your mbrace account into the cor-

responding field.

Click "Send".

Information on specific commands such as

"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the

website.

Calling up a transmitted destination

address

Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 111).

The transmitted destination address is loaded

into the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whether

navigation should be started.

SelectYesYes by turning 3 or sliding 1

the controller and confirm with 7.

The system calculates the route and subse-

quently starts the route guidance with the

address entered.

If you select NoNo the address can be stored in

the address book.

If you have sent more than one destination

address, each individual destination must be

confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the same

order as the order in which they were sent.

If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles

with mbrace and active mbrace accounts:

If multiple vehicles are registered under the

same e-mail address, the destination will be

sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening

You can use the vehicle remote unlocking if you

have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a

replacement SmartKey is not available.

The vehicle can then be unlocked by the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately unlocked

remotely within four days of the ignition being

turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking

may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked

remotely.

The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-

ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-

able and a data connection is possible.

Contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)

or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon

with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-

tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:

the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-

tion

telephone applications (e.g. for iPhone

Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-

ber and password.

Vehicle remote closing

The vehicle remote closing feature can be used

when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and

you are no longer nearby.

The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked

within four days of the ignition being turned off.

After this time, remote closing may be delayed

by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle

can no longer be locked remotely.

The vehicle remote closing feature is available if

the relevant mobile phone network is available

and a data connection is possible.

Contact the following service hotlines:

Features

227

Stowage and features

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES (1-800-367-6372)

or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you

switch on the ignition, the Doors LockedDoors Locked

RemotelyRemotely message appears in the multifunction

display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:

the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-

tion

telephone applications (e.g. for iPhone

Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-

ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service

If your vehicle has been stolen:

Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident

report.

Forward this number to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center along with your

PIN.

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center then tries to locate the system. The

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

contacts you and the local law enforcement

agency if the vehicle is located.

However, only the law enforcement agency is

informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for

longer than 30 seconds, mbrace automatically

notifies the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-

tance Center.

Vehicle Health Check

With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer

Assistance Center can provide improved sup-

port for problems with your vehicle. During an

existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the

Customer Assistance Center.

The customer service representative can use

the received data to decide what kind of assis-

tance is required. You are then, for example,

guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service

Center or a recovery vehicle is called.

If vehicle data need to be transferred during an

Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is

initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

The Roadside Assistance ConnectedRoadside Assistance Connected mes-

sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health

Check can be started, the RequestRequest forfor Vehi‐Vehi‐

cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐

cle diagnostics?cle diagnostics? message appears in the

display.

Press the YesYes button to confirm the message.

If the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseVehicle Diagnostics Please

Start IgnitionStart Ignition message appears: turn the

SmartKey to key position 2 in the ignition

lock (Y page 111).

If the Please follow the instructionsPlease follow the instructions

receivedreceived byby phonephone andand movemove youryour vehi‐vehi‐

cle to a safe position.cle to a safe position. message

appears: please follow the instructions

received by phone and move your vehicle to a

safe position.

The message in the display disappears.

The vehicle operating state check begins.

During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐Vehi‐

cle Diagnostics Activecle Diagnostics Active message.

If you select CancelCancel, the Vehicle Health

Check is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the SendingSending

vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐

nection may be interrupted duringnection may be interrupted during

datadata transfer)transfer) message appears. The vehicle

data can now be sent.

Press the OKOK button to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the Customer

Assistance Center is terminated.

The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐

ring Data...ring Data... message appears.

The vehicle data is sent to the Customer

Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-

resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-

tion is re-established after the transfer is com-

plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a

later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or

phone.

Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is

the transfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display

shows a message to this effect together with

information about any special offers at your

workshop.

This information can also be called up under

"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle

(Y page 29).

228

Features

Stowage and features

Information on Roadside Assistance

(Y page 26).

Downloading routes

Downloading routes allows you to transfer and

save predefined routes in the navigation sys-

tem.

A route can be prepared and sent either by a

customer service representative or under "Own-

ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Each route can include up to four way points.

Once a route has been received by the naviga-

tion system, you will see the DoDo youyou wantwant toto

start route guidance? Destinationstart route guidance? Destination

Received destination has been savedReceived destination has been saved

in "Previous destinations".in "Previous destinations". message on

the multimedia system display.

The route is saved.

To start route guidance: select YesYes.

An overview of the route is shown in the dis-

play.

If you select NoNo, the saved route can be called

up later in the navigation menu.

Select StartStart.

Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called up

again.

Speed alert

You can define the upper speed limit, which

must not be exceeded by the vehicle.

If the vehicle exceeds the set speed, a message

is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The

Customer Assistance Center then forwards this

information to you.

You can select the way in which you receive this

information beforehand. Possible options

include text message, e-mail or an automated

call.

The data you receive contains the following

information:

the location where the speed limit was excee-

ded

the time at which the speed limit was excee-

ded

the selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing

Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the

vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be

informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries

of the selected areas. You can select the way in

which you receive this information beforehand.

Possible options include text message, e-mail or

an automated call.

The area can be determined as either a circle or

a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You

can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-

ferent settings are possible for each area.

These settings can be called up under "Owners

Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Alternatively, you can also trigger an Info call

and notify the customer service representative

that you wish to activate geo-fencing.

Currently inactive areas can be activated by text

message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm

With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's

panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds

and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on

the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-

onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Rear spoiler

Overview

The rear spoiler improves the handling of the

vehicle. It adapts the vehicle's aerodynamics to

the operating conditions, dependent on the

speed of the vehicle.

Only use button : to extend and retract the

rear spoiler manually for cleaning.

Button : is not used to operate the rear spoiler.

Features

229

Stowage and features

The rear spoiler is extended automatically if you

drive faster than:

75 mph (120 km/h) in drive programs C, S

and S+

44 mph (70 km/h) in drive program RACE

Button : flashes until the rear spoiler has

extended and then lights up in red.

The rear spoiler is retracted automatically when

you drive slower than:

50 mph (80 km/h) in drive programs C, S and

S+

19 mph (30 km/h) in drive program RACE

Button : flashes until the rear spoiler has

retracted and then goes out.

Extending and retracting the rear

spoiler manually

WARNING

Body parts could become trapped if you man-

ually extend/retract the rear spoiler. There is

a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody is within the range of

movement of the rear spoiler.

If someone becomes trapped during retrac-

tion of the rear spoiler, release the button

immediately. The rear spoiler then extends

again.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Do not enter an automatic car wash with the

rear spoiler extended. Otherwise, the rear

spoiler may be damaged.

Only extend the rear spoiler in order to clean

it by hand. Retract it again when you have fin-

ished cleaning it.

You can extend and retract the rear spoiler man-

ually for cleaning.

Close the trunk lid.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

To extend: press button :.

The rear spoiler is extended.

Button : flashes until the rear spoiler has

extended and then lights up in red.

To retract: press and hold button : until the

rear spoiler is completely retracted.

Button : flashes until the rear spoiler has

retracted and then goes out.

Rear Spoiler Retracts ManuallyRear Spoiler Retracts Manually

appears in the display.

If you release button : while retracting the rear

spoiler, it extends again automatically.

Problems with the rear spoiler

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The rear spoiler stops

before reaching the end

position when retracting

manually.

You have opened the trunk lid while manually retracting the rear

spoiler.

Close the trunk lid.

The rear spoiler extends or, if you press and hold the ¬ button,

continues retracting.

The rear spoiler stops

before reaching the end

position when retract-

ing/extending manually.

You have switched off the ignition.

Switch the ignition back on.

Press the ¬ button.

The rear spoiler extends/retracts.

230

Features

Stowage and features

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The rear spoiler cannot

be retracted again after

manually extending it.

You have opened the trunk lid while manually extending the rear

spoiler.

Close the trunk lid.

The rear spoiler does not

extend or retract auto-

matically.

The rear spoiler's movement is blocked, e.g. by an object jammed

between the body and the rear spoiler.

Remove the object.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink

garage door opener integrated

in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up

to three different door and gate systems.

Use the integrated garage door opener only on

garage doors that:

they are equipped with a safety stop and

reverse feature

they conform to the current U.S. safety stand-

ards

When it has been programmed, the integrated

garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will

assume the function of the garage door sys-

tem's remote control. Please also read the oper-

ating instructions for the garage door system.

When programming a garage door opener, park

the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the

engine running while programming it.

Certain garage door drives are incompatible

with the integrated garage door opener. If you

have difficulty programing the integrated garage

door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service

Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following tele-

phone assistance services:

USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

Canada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100

HomeLink

hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of

charge)

More information on HomeLink

and/or com-

patible products is also available on the Internet

at http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity

(Y page 27).

USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

WARNING

When you operate or program the door with

the integrated garage door opener, persons in

the range of movement of the door may

become trapped or be struck by the door.

There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage door

opener, always make sure that nobody is

within the range of movement of the door.

DANGER

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases is hazardous to health

and can result in poisoning. There is a risk of

fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine

running an enclosed space without adequate

ventilation.

Programming

Programming the buttons

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"

(Y page 231).

Features

231

Stowage and features

Garage door remote control A is not included

with the integrated garage door opener.

Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/

Stop button (Y page 111).

Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-

trol the garage door drive.

To start programming mode: press and

hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated

garage door opener.

The garage door opener is now in program-

ming mode. After a short time, indicator

lamp : lights up yellow.

Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as

button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.

If the selected button has already been pro-

gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up

yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator

lamp : flashes yellow.

To program the remote control: point

garage door remote control A towards but-

tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-

tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

Press and hold button B on remote control

A until indicator lamp : lights up green.

When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-

gramming is finished.

When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-

gramming was successful. The next step is to

synchronize the rolling code (Y page 232).

Release button B on remote control A for

the garage door drive system.

If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the

programing procedure for the corresponding

button on the rear-view mirror. When doing

so, vary the distance between remote control

A and the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote con-

trol A and the integrated garage door opener

depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least

25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"

(Y page 231).

If the garage door system uses a rolling code,

you will also have to synchronize the garage

door system with the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will

need to use the programming button on the door

drive control panel. The programming button

may be located in different places depending on

the manufacturer. It is usually located on the

door drive unit on the garage ceiling.

Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive

operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-

ming additional remote controls", before carry-

ing out the following steps.

Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage

door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-

ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are

present within the sweep of the door or gate.

Select SmartKey position 2 with the Start/

Stop button (Y page 111).

Get out of the vehicle.

Press the programming button on the door

drive unit.

You now have 30 seconds to initiate the next

step.

Get into the vehicle.

Press previously programed button ;, =

or ? on the integrated garage door opener

repeatedly until the door closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then com-

plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-

trol

Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"

(or interruption) of the transmission signals

after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,

these signals may not last long enough for the

integrated garage door opener. The signal is not

recognized during programming. Comparable

with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open-

ers also feature a "break".

232

Features

Stowage and features

Proceed as follows:

if you live in Canada.

if you have difficulties programming the

garage door opener (regardless of where you

live) when following the programming steps.

Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the

integrated garage door opener.

After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up

yellow.

Release the button.

Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.

Press button B of garage door remote con-

trol A for two seconds, then release it for two

seconds.

Press button B again for two seconds.

Repeat this sequence on button B of remote

control A until indicator lamp : lights up

green.

When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-

gramming is finished.

When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-

gramming was successful. The next step is to

synchronize the rolling code.

Release button B of remote control A of the

garage door drive.

When indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat

the programming process for the correspond-

ing button on the rear-view mirror. When

doing so, vary the distance between remote

control A and the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote con-

trol A and the integrated garage door opener

depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least

25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming

If you are experiencing problems programming

the integrated garage door opener on the rear-

view mirror, take note of the following instruc-

tions:

Check the transmitter frequency used by

garage door drive remote control A and

whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-

quency can usually be found on the back of

remote control A for the garage door drive.

The integrated garage door opener is com-

patible with devices that have units which

operate in the frequency range of 280 to

433 MHz.

Replace the batteries in garage door remote

control A. This increases the likelihood that

garage door remote control A will transmit a

strong and precise signal to the integrated

garage door opener.

When programming, hold remote control A

at varying distances and angles from but-

tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try

various angles at a distance between 2and

8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but

at varying distances.

If a further remote control A is available for

the same garage door drive, repeat the same

programming steps with this remote control

A. Before performing these steps, make sure

that new batteries have been installed in

garage door drive remote control A.

Note that some remote controls only transmit

for a limited amount of time (the indicator

lamp on the remote control goes out). Press

button B on remote control A again before

transmission ends.

Align the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signal recep-

tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated

garage door opener performs the function of the

garage door system remote control. Please also

read the operating instructions for the garage

door system.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

Press button ;, = or ? which you pro-

grammed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-

cator lamp : lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-

cator lamp : flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as long

as the button is pressed. The transmission is

halted after a maximum of ten seconds and

indicator lamp : lights up yellow.

Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.

Features

233

Stowage and features

Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the

integrated garage door opener before selling the

vehicle.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button (Y page 111).

Press and hold buttons ; and ?.

Indicator lamp : initially lights up yellow and

then green.

Release buttons ; and ?.

The memory of the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is

jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.

Slide the driver's seat backwards.

To install: place the floormat in position.

Press studs : onto retainers ;.

To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.

Remove the floormat.

234

Features

Stowage and features

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

WARNING

If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when

the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

There is a risk of an accident.

Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before

every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

WARNING

When opening and closing the hood, it may

suddenly fall into the closed position. There is

a risk of injury to persons within range of

movement of the hood.

Open and close the hood only when no one is

within its range of movement.

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is over-

heated or when there is a fire in the engine

compartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk of

injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before

opening the hood. If there is a fire in the

engine compartment, keep the hood closed

and contact the fire department.

WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving

components. Certain components, such as

the radiator fan, may continue to run or start

again suddenly when the ignition is off. There

is a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the engine

compartment:

switch off the ignition

never reach into the area where there is a

risk of danger from moving components,

such as the fan rotation area

remove jewelry and watches

keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

ple, away from moving parts

WARNING

The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-

tem work under high voltage. If you touch

components which are under voltage, you

could get an electric shock. There is a risk of

injury.

Never touch components of the ignition sys-

tem or fuel injection system when the ignition

is switched on.

Opening the hood

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compart-

ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a

risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the

following.

WARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield

wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by

the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before opening the hood.

Make sure that the windshield wipers are

not folded away from the windshield. You

could otherwise damage the windshield wip-

ers or the hood.

Engine compartment

235

Maintenance and care

Make sure that the windshield wipers are

turned off.

Pull release lever : on the hood.

The hood is released.

Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ;

up and lift the hood.

If you lift the hood, the hood is opened and

held open automatically by the gas-filled

strut.

Closing the hood

WARNING

When opening and closing the hood, it may

suddenly fall into the closed position. There is

a risk of injury to persons within range of

movement of the hood.

Open and close the hood only when no one is

within its range of movement.

Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of

approximately 8 in (20 cm).

Check that the hood has engaged properly.

If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not

properly engaged. Open it again and close it

with a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil level

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle

consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per

600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may

be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if

you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be

in a different location.

It is only possible to correctly measure the oil

level when:

the engine is at normal operating temperature

the vehicle is parked on a level surface

the engine is left running in neutral for at least

30 seconds before switching off

This applies when checking the oil level using

the oil dipstick or on-board computer.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-

stick

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compart-

ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a

risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the

following.

It is only possible to correctly measure the oil

level with the oil dipstick when the engine is at

normal operating temperature and in a period of

2 to minutes after the engine has been switched

off.

236

Engine compartment

Maintenance and care

Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide

tube.

Wipe off oil dipstick :.

Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube

to the stop, and take it out again.

If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX

mark ;, the oil level is correct.

If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or

below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer

Calling up the oil level measurement

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.

Use : or 9 to select the Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level submenu.

Press a to confirm the selection.

The Measuring Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is LevelMeasuring Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is Level message

appears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see a message in the multifunction display. The

messages are explained in the following chapter.

Engine oil level display messages

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Engine Oil Level OKEngine Oil Level OK

The engine oil level is correct.

Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil

Level (Add 1 Liter)Level (Add 1 Liter)

The engine oil level is too low.

Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Reduce Engine OilReduce Engine Oil

LevelLevel

The engine oil level is too high.

Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine OilFor Engine Oil

LevelLevel IgnitionIgnition MustMust

Be OnBe On

The ignition is switched off.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

Need More Time toNeed More Time to

Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil

LevelLevel

The required waiting period was not observed.

The engine must be at regular operating temperature.

Measurements can only be taken within the first four minutes after

the engine has been switched off.

Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level

NotNot MeasurableMeasurable withwith

Engine RunningEngine Running

The engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible.

Switch off the engine.

Repeat the measurement. Observe the required waiting period.

Engine compartment

237

Maintenance and care

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level

CorrectCorrect MeasurementMeasurement

Only if Vehicle IsOnly if Vehicle Is

on Level Groundon Level Ground

The vehicle is not parked on a level surface.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level

Not MeasurableNot Measurable

Oil level measurement with the oil dipstick is possible. The measuring

system is malfunctioning.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adding engine oil

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compart-

ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a

risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the

following.

WARNING

If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-

ponents in the engine compartment, it may

ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to

the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and

thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-

ponents before starting the engine.

Environmental note

When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If

oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to

the environment.

Use only engine oils and oil filters that are

approved for vehicles with a service system. A

list of the engine oils and oil filters that have

been tested and approved in accordance with

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products is available at any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

The following cause engine failure or damage

to the exhaust system:

Use of engine oils and oil filters that have

not been expressly approved for the service

system

Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after

the replacement interval specified by the

service system has expired

Use of engine oil additives

Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is

above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too

much oil has been added. This can lead to

damage to the engine or the catalytic con-

verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap

Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.

Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on

the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of

engine oil.

Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn

clockwise.

Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick

(Y page 236).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 291).

238

Engine compartment

Maintenance and care

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compart-

ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a

risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the

following.

WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is over-

heated or when there is a fire in the engine

compartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk of

injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before

opening the hood. If there is a fire in the

engine compartment, keep the hood closed

and contact the fire department.

WARNING

The cooling system is pressurized, particularly

when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,

you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.

There is a risk of injury.

Let the engine cool down before you open the

cap. Wear protective gloves and protective

eyewear when opening. Open the cap slowly

to release pressure.

Before starting your journey, make sure that

all engine covers are installed. Otherwise, the

engine can be damaged, e.g. through over-

heating.

Example

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicle

is on a level surface and the engine has cooled

down.

Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop

button.

Check the coolant temperature display in the

instrument cluster.

The coolant temperature must be below

158 ‡ (70 †).

Select key position u with the Start/Stop

button.

Remove engine cover : upwards on both

sides.

Slowly turn cap ; half a turn counter-clock-

wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

Turn cap ; further counter-clockwise and

remove it.

If the coolant is at the level of the marker bar

in the filler neck when cold, there is enough

coolant in coolant expansion tank =.

If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) above the marker bar in the filler

neck when warm, there is enough coolant in

coolant expansion tank =.

If necessary, add coolant that has been tested

and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Engine compartment

239

Maintenance and care

Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far as

it will go.

Replace engine cover :.

For further information on coolant, see

(Y page 292).

Windshield washer system

WARNING

Certain components in the engine compart-

ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a

risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the

following.

WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-

mable. If windshield washer concentrate gets

onto hot components of the engine or the

exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of

fire and injury.

Make sure that windshield washer concen-

trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler

neck.

Example

To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.

Add the premixed washer fluid.

To close: press cap : onto the filler neck

until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-

mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears

in the multifunction display prompting you to

add washer fluid (Y page 197).

Further information on windshield washer fluid/

antifreeze (Y page 292).

ASSYST PLUS

Service message

If the scheduled service intervals are excee-

ded, this may result in damage to the vehicle.

You can obtain up-to-date information concern-

ing the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Service Center or at

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

informs you of the next service due date.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

does not show any information on the engine

oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil

level (Y page 236).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-

sage for several seconds, e.g.:

Service A in XX DaysService A in XX Days

Service A DueService A Due

Service A Overdue by XX DaysService A Overdue by XX Days

Depending on the operating conditions of the

vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the

next service due date is displayed.

The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with a

number or another letter, shows the type of ser-

vice. AA stands for a minor service and BB for a

major service.

You can obtain further information from an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does

not take into account any periods of time during

which the battery is disconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-

ule:

Note down the service due date displayed in

the multifunction display before disconnect-

ing the battery.

After reconnecting the battery, subtract the

battery disconnection periods from the ser-

vice date shown on the display.

240

ASSYST PLUS

Maintenance and care

Hiding a service message

Press the a or % button on the steering

wheel.

Displaying service messages

Switch on the ignition.

Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to

select the ServiceService menu and confirm with

Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to

select the ASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and con-

firm with a.

The service due date appears in the multi-

function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service

interval display

If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

has been inadvertently reset, this setting can

be corrected at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Have service work carried out as described in

the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise

lead to increased wear and damage to the

major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Service Center, will reset

the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after

the service work has been carried out. You can

also obtain further information on maintenance

work, for example.

Special service requirements

The specified maintenance interval takes only

the normal operation of the vehicle into

account. Under arduous operating conditions or

increased load on the vehicle, maintenance

work must be carried out more frequently, for

example:

Regular city driving with frequent intermedi-

ate stops

If the vehicle is primarily used to travel short

distances

Use in mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfaces

If the engine is often left idling for long periods

In racetrack mode

Under these or similar conditions, have, for

example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter

replaced or changed more frequently. Under

arduous operating conditions, the tires must be

checked more often. Further information can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

In racetrack mode, the vehicle is subject to

higher loads, meaning that additional main-

tenance work is required. If you plan race-

track use, consult a qualified specialist work-

shop first. Mercedes-Benz recommends that

you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Ser-

vice Center for this purpose.

Driving abroad

An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is

also available in other countries. You can obtain

further information from any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

Care

General notes

Environmental note

Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning

cloths in an environmentally responsible man-

ner.

When cleaning your car, do not use:

dry, coarse or hard cloths

abrasive cleaning agents

solvents

cleaning agents containing solvents

Do not scrub.

Do not touch the surfaces and films with hard

objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Otherwise,

you may scratch or damage the surfaces and

films.

Do not park your vehicle for a long period of

time directly after cleaning, particularly after

cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-

rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,

Care

241

Maintenance and care

drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By

heating up the brakes, the brake discs and

pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a

long period of time.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for

retaining the quality in the long term.

Use care products and cleaning agents recom-

mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the

paintwork

Automatic car wash

WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake

carefully while paying attention to the traffic

conditions until full braking power is restored.

When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is

activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in

certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

these systems in the following or similar sit-

uations:

when towing the vehicle

in the car wash

Preferably use automatic car washes with

adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. This

corresponds with the specification for the

Cabriolet program. In car washes that use

high water pressures, there is a risk that a

small amount of water may leak into the vehi-

cle.

Make sure that the vehicle is not subse-

quently treated with hot wax.

Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Automatic Car Wash as these use special

cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can

damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

If you have your vehicle cleaned in a high-

pressure automatic car wash, small amounts

of water may enter the vehicle.

If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-

tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-

tional opening of the trunk lid:

when using an automatic car wash

when using a power washer

Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft

(3 m) away from the vehicle.

Make sure that:

the side windows are fully closed

the blower of the ventilation/heating sys-

tem is switched off

the windshield wiper switch is at position

the rear-view camera is deactivated

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

When washing your vehicle in a tow-through

car wash, use the SmartKey instead of the

Start/Stop button.

Start the engine using the SmartKey. Set the

transmission to i with the E-SELECT selec-

tor lever. Switch the engine off again with the

SmartKey by turning the SmartKey to position

2. Make sure that you then leave the Smart-

Key in position 2. You may otherwise dam-

age the vehicle, the transmission or the car

wash.

Check the transmission position in the instru-

ment cluster.

Before switching off the engine, use the

E‑SELECT lever to shift the transmission to

i. If you open the driver's or front-passenger

door, the transmission remains in this posi-

tion for up to 30 minutes if the key is in the

ignition, even if the engine is switched off. If

you do not shift the transmission to i using

the E‑SELECT lever beforehand, it shifts auto-

matically to parking position j and locks the

wheels if the driver's or front-passenger door

is opened when the engine is switched off.

This may damage the vehicle, the transmis-

sion or the car wash.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car

wash from the very start.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before

cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax

from the windshield and the wiper blades. This

will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises

caused by residue on the windshield.

242

Care

Maintenance and care

Washing by hand

In some countries, washing by hand is only

allowed at specially equipped washing bays.

Observe the legal requirements in each country.

Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.

Use a soft sponge to clean.

Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-

tle jet of water.

Do not point the water jet directly towards the

air inlet.

Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge

frequently.

Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.

Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-

work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as

soon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-

edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet

nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-

diately.

Always maintain a distance of at least

11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the

high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information

about the correct distance is available from

the equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when

cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

tires

door gaps, joints etc.

soft top

wind deflector net

electrical components

battery

plug-type couplings

lights

seals

trim

ventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components can

lead to leaks or failures.

Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your

vehicle are covered with decorative film.

Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)

between the film-covered parts of the vehicle

and the nozzle of the power washer.

Information about the correct distance is

available from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when

cleaning your vehicle.

The water temperature of the power washer

must not exceed 140 ‡ (60 †).

If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-

tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-

tional opening of the trunk lid:

when using an automatic car wash

when using a power washer

Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft

(3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

Do not affix:

stickers

films

magnetic plates or similar items

to painted surfaces. You could otherwise

damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by

corrosion and damage caused by inadequate

care cannot always be completely repaired. In

such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

while avoiding rubbing too hard.

Soak insect remains with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off

the treated areas afterwards.

Remove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by

rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-

leum ether or lighter fluid.

Care

243

Maintenance and care

Remove coolant and brake fluid with a moist

cloth and clear water.

Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

Use silicone remover to remove wax.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint

surface, use the paint care products recommen-

ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the

case approximately every three to five months,

depending on the climate conditions and the

care product used.

If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the

paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-

mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz

should be used.

Do not use these care products in the sun or on

the hood while the hood is hot.

Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-

Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-

work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

The following can give the paint a glossy

appearance and thus reduce the matt effect:

Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents

Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight

Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing

products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the

purpose of paintwork care. These products

are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their

use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to

considerable surface damage or, more spe-

cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.

Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Only use automatic car washes which cor-

respond to the latest technological stand-

ards. Never use wash programs which finish

by treating the vehicle with hot wax.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear

matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage

to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.

These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with

a clear matte finish.

Use only insect remover and car shampoo

from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz

care products.

Cleaning the decorative film

The following may have an effect on the ser-

vice life and color of decorative film:

sunlight

temperature, e.g. hot-air fan

weather conditions

stone impacts and dirt

chemical cleaning agents

greasy substances

Do not use any types of polish on matt dec-

orative film. Polishing surfaces covered with

film gives it a shiny finish.

Do not treat matt or structured decorative

film with wax. This may lead to marks that

cannot be removed.

Observe the notes in the matte finish paintwork

care and treatment chapter (Y page 244).

These notes also apply for matte decorative

films.

To clean, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning

agent without additional or abrasive products,

e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-

Benz.

Dry vehicles covered with film using a soft,

absorbent cloth after every wash.

Water marks could otherwise form.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by

corrosion and damage caused by inadequate

care cannot always be completely repaired. In

such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

while avoiding rubbing too hard.

The decorative film may be irreparably dam-

aged.

Soak insect remains with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off

the treated areas afterwards.

The Paint Cleaner cleaning product, which has

been approved and recommended for

Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has

penetrated the decorative film surface or the

decorative film has become dull.

The manufacturer can provide you with infor-

mation on special care and cleaning products.

Surfaces covered with a decorative film may,

once a decorative film has been removed, show

visual differences from the surfaces that were

not protected by a decorative film.

244

Care

Maintenance and care

Have work or repairs on decorative film car-

ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this

purpose.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-

edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet

nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-

diately.

Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products

to remove brake dust. This could damage

wheel bolts and brake components.

Do not park your vehicle for a long period of

time directly after cleaning, particularly after

cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-

rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,

drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By

heating up the brakes, the brake discs and

pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a

long period of time.

Cleaning the windows

WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield

wipers if they start moving while cleaning the

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before cleaning the windshield or

wiper blades.

Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,

solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-

vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do

not touch the insides of the windows with

hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There

is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

Clean the water drainage channels of the

windshield and the rear window at regular

intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and

pollen may under certain circumstances pre-

vent water from draining away. This can lead

to corrosion damage and damage to elec-

tronic components.

Clean the inside and outside of the windows

with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that

is recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Cleaning the soft top

Never use any of the following to clean the

soft top:

gasoline

thinner

tar or stain remover

other organic solvents

Remove bird droppings immediately, as

they are corrosive and can therefore cause

the soft-top fabric to leak. Do not wash the

vehicle with a power washer or in a car wash

that uses power washers. Do not use sharp-

edged equipment to remove ice and snow.

Light soiling: you can clean the soft top while

it is dry or rinse it with clear water.

Normal to heavy soiling: clean the soft top

with a brush and clear water. Clean stains and

other dirt with a brush and soft top cleaning

agents that have been recommended and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always brush

from front to back, following the grain of the

fabric.

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's resist-

ance to dirt.

To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the soft

top using soft top cleaning agents that have

been recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,

can cause the soft-top seams to leak. In the

event of this happening, have the soft-top seams

sealed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Cover the soft top appropriately if you plan

to leave the vehicle outside for a long period

of time.

Care

245

Maintenance and care

Cleaning wiper blades

WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield

wipers if they start moving while cleaning the

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before cleaning the windshield or

wiper blades.

Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the

wiper blade could be damaged.

Do not clean wiper blades too often and do

not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-

ite coating could be damaged. This could

cause wiper noise.

Hold the wiper arm securely when folding

back. The windshield could be damaged if the

wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the

windshield.

Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp

cloth.

Fold the windshield wiper arms back again

before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

which are suitable for plastic light lenses.

Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

could scratch or damage the plastic light len-

ses.

Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-

ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning

agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or

cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable

cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could

scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the

mirror turn signals.

Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-

nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet

sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning

cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

If you clean the sensors with a power

washer, make sure that you keep a distance

of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle

and the power washer nozzle. Information

about the correct distance is available from

the equipment manufacturer.

Clean sensors : of the driving systems with

water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

Do not clean the camera lens and the area

around the rear view camera with a power

washer.

Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-

era lens :.

246

Care

Maintenance and care

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

WARNING

The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can

become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn

yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-

ing them.

Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents, such as bathroom

cleaner or wheel cleaner.

Vehicles with black exhaust pipes: black

chromed screens should not be polished with

a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their

black shine. For optimal care, the screens

should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth

after every car wash. Commercially available

engine and care oils are suitable for this.

For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-

work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove

the excess polish residue after polishing.

Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care

product tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit

and corrosive environmental factors may cause

flash rust to form on the surface. You can

restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by

cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and

after washing.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

For cleaning, do not use any of the following:

alcohol-based thinner or gasoline

abrasive cleaning agents

commercially-available household cleaning

agents

These may damage the display surface. Do

not put pressure on the display surface when

cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-

age to the display.

Before cleaning the display, make sure that it

is switched off and has cooled down.

Clean the display surface using a commer-

cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD

display cleaner.

Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber

cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

WARNING

Care products and cleaning agents containing

solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to

become porous. As a result, plastic parts may

come loose in the event of air bag deploy-

ment. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use any care products and cleaning

agents to clean the cockpit.

Never attach the following to plastic surfa-

ces:

stickers

films

perfume oil container or similar

You could otherwise damage the plastic.

Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-

tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of

the surfaces.

Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free

cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-

ucts recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

The surface may change color temporarily.

Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or

selector lever

Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have been recom-

mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trim elements

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes

or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-

ing the surface.

Care

247

Maintenance and care

Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.

The trim pieces have a chrome look but are

mostly made of anodized aluminum and can

lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use

a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning

the trim pieces.

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very

dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are

unsure as to whether the trim pieces are

chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint-free

cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-

ucts recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes

Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers

made out of real leather, artificial leather or

DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage

the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure

that the appearance and comfort of the cov-

ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers

To retain the natural appearance of the

leather, observe the following cleaning

instructions:

Clean genuine leather covers carefully with

a damp cloth and then wipe the covers

down with a dry cloth.

Make sure that the leather does not

become soaked. It may otherwise become

rough and cracked.

Only use leather care agents that have

been tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified

specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.

It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for

example:

differences in the texture

marks caused by growth and injury

slight nuances of color

These are characteristics of leather and not

material defects.

Seat covers of other materials

Observe the following when cleaning:

clean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%

detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%

detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub

carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-

tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave

the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results

depend on the type of dirt and how long it

has been there.

clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.

Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-

tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

WARNING

Seat belts can become severely weakened if

bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat

belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of

an accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or fatal injury.

Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by

heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †)

or in direct sunlight.

Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the carpets

Use the carpet and textile cleaning agents

recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

248

Care

Maintenance and care

Where will I find...?

Reflective safety jacket

Removing/replacing the reflective

safety jacket

The reflective safety jackets are located in front

door stowage compartments :.

To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag

containing the reflective safety jacket.

Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the

reflective safety jacket.

To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll

it up and stow it in safety jacket bag.

Replace the safety jacket bag into stowage

compartment :.

Remove a new reflective safety jacket from

its packaging material before sliding it into

the stowage compartment. The packaging

material may otherwise cause it to slip out or

make removing it difficult.

Observe the legal requirements in each country.

Information on reflective safety jackets

Maximum number of washes

;

Maximum wash temperature

Do not bleach

Do not iron

Do not use a laundry dryer

Do not dry-clean

This is a class 2 jacket

The reflective safety jackets meet the require-

ments defined by the legal standard only:

if the correct size is used

if the reflective safety jackets are correctly

fastened

Before use, ensure that the reflective safety

jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-

erties may otherwise be compromised.

The reflective safety jackets should be stored

in their original packaging in a dry place away

from sources of heat and light.

The maximum number of washes specified is

not the only factor influencing the life span of

the reflective safety jackets. Their life span

also depends on use, care, storage, etc.

The reflective safety jackets should be dis-

posed of and replaced with new ones:

after 15 washes, and/or

if the reflective strips have become

scratched, and/or

if the backing material and/or reflective

strips have become soiled and cannot be

cleaned off, and/or

if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the

effects of sunlight

Dispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-

ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,

contact your local waste disposal company.

Vehicle tool kit

General notes

Apart from certain country-specific variations,

the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change

tool kit.

Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to

the vehicle. For more information on which tire

changing tools are required and approved to

perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult

a qualified specialist workshop.

Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for

example:

jack

wheel chock

Where will I find...?

249

Breakdown assistance

lug wrench

alignment bolt

The vehicle tool kit is located on the left side of

the trunk in the stowage compartment behind

service flap : or in the stowage compartment

under trunk floor ;.

The vehicle tool kit is located on the left side of

the trunk in the stowage compartment behind

service flap : or in the stowage compartment

under trunk floor ;.

The towing eye is on the left side of the trunk in

the stowage compartment under trunk floor ;.

To open the stowage compartment under trunk

floor ;, pull the sewed-on tab.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit

Example

Folding wheel chock

;

Alignment bolt

Lug wrench

Towing eye

Jack

The tire-change tool kit is located on the left side

of the trunk in the stowage compartment under

the trunk floor.

Please note that there can be equipment- and

country-specific deviations for vehicles with a

tire-change tool kit.

Depending on the equipment, tools required for

a wheel change, such as a jack or a lug wrench,

are not available in all vehicles. Tools approved

for your vehicle are available at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Example

Tire inflation compressor

;

Tire sealant filler bottle

The TIREFIT kit is located on the left side of the

trunk in the stowage compartment behind the

service flap.

Removing:

Open the trunk lid.

Turn the fastener on the service flap counter-

clockwise.

Open the service flap.

Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 251).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Your vehicle may be equipped with:

a TIREFIT kit (Y page 249)

Vehicles with an mbrace system (USA only)

which are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit: in the

event of a flat tire, contact the Customer Assis-

tance Center for the mbrace emergency call

system (Y page 223).

Information on changing and mounting wheels

(Y page 281).

250

Flat tire

Breakdown assistance

Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible from

traffic.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 127).

If possible, bring the front wheels into the

straight-ahead position.

Switch off the engine.

With KEYLESS-GO start function or vehi-

cles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's

door.

The vehicle electronics are now in key posi-

tion u. This is the same as the key having

been removed.

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Make sure that the passengers are not endan-

gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is

near the danger area while a wheel is being

changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting

in the wheel change should, for example,

stand behind the barrier.

Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic

conditions when doing so.

Close the driver's door.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes

TIREFIT is a tire sealant.

You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to

0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire

tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-

tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

WARNING

In the following situations, the tire sealant is

unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-

tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:

there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger

than those mentioned above.

the wheel rim is damaged.

you have driven at very low tire pressures or

on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

WARNING

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-

tion. It must not come into contact with your

skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not

inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away

from children. There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tire sealant,

observe the following:

Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately with water.

If the tire sealant comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-

oughly with clean water.

If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink

plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,

and seek medical attention immediately.

Immediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with tire sealant.

If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

Do not operate the tire inflation compressor

for longer than ten minutes at a time without

a break. It may otherwise overheat.

The tire inflation compressor can be operated

again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-

tions on the tire inflation compressor label and

on the tire sealant bottle.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Do not remove any foreign objects which have

penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-

nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation

compressor from the stowage compartment

in the trunk (Y page 249).

Flat tire

251

Breakdown assistance

Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the

instrument cluster within the driver's field of

vision.

Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the

valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

Tire sealant filler bottle

;

Recess

On/off switch

Connector

Hose

Flange

Pull connector ? with cable and hose A out

of the tire inflation compressor housing.

Push connector on hose A into flange B on

tire sealant bottle : until the connector

engages.

Place tire sealant bottle : head down into

recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.

Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty

tire.

Screw filler hose D onto valve C.

Insert connector ? into cigarette lighter

socket (Y page 222) or into another 12 V

socket in your vehicle (Y page 222).

Switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop

button.

Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-

tion lock (Y page 111).

Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation

compressor.

The tire inflation compressor is switched on.

The tire is inflated.

First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The

pressure may briefly rise to approximately

500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation com-

pressor during this phase.

Let the tire inflation compressor run for a

maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then

have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa

(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has

been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-

sure reached" (Y page 253).

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has

not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire

pressure not reached" (Y page 253).

If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected

areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to

use clean water.

If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have

them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry

cleaner as soon as possible.

252

Flat tire

Breakdown assistance

Tire pressure not reached

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not

been attained after five minutes:

Switch off the tire inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is

unscrewed.

Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-

imately 30 ft (10 m).

Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres-

sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/

26 psi).

WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached

after the specified time, the tire is too badly

damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the

tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire

pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-

acteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

WARNING

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant

impairs the driving characteristics and is not

suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of

accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed

the specified maximum speed with a tire that

has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tire

sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).

The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be

affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's

field of vision.

Residue from the tire sealant may come out

of the filler hose after use. This could cause

stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic

bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

Environmental note

Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist

workshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has

been attained after five minutes:

Switch off the tire inflation compressor.

Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is

unscrewed.

Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-

tion compressor.

Pull away immediately.

Stop after driving for approximately ten

minutes and check the tire pressure with the

tire inflation compressor.

The tire pressure must now be at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached

after driving for a short period, the tire is too

badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a

tire pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-

acteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above,

contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-

ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and

Loading Information placard on the driver's

side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the

fuel filler flap for values.

To increase the tire pressure: switch on the

tire inflation compressor.

Flat tire

253

Breakdown assistance

To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-

sure release button : next to pressure

gauge ;.

When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the

filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is

unscrewed.

Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the

sealed tire.

Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-

tion compressor.

The filler hose remains attached to the tire

sealant bottle.

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop and have the tire changed there.

Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon

as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every

four years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notes

Special tools and expert knowledge are required

when working on the battery, e.g. removal and

installation. You should therefore have all work

involving the battery carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

WARNING

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery

can lead, for example, to a short circuit and

thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can

lead to function restrictions applying to

safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-

tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-

ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.

You could lose control of the vehicle, for

example:

when braking

in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not

adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.

In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-

dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop

immediately. Do not drive any further. You

should have all work involving the battery car-

ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS (Y page 58)

and ESP

(Y page 62).

Environmental note

Batteries contain dangerous

substances. It is against the

law to dispose of them with

the household rubbish. They

must be collected separately

and recycled to protect the

environment.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally friendly

manner. Take discharged

batteries to a qualified spe-

cialist workshop or a special

collection point for used bat-

teries.

Have the battery regularly checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

For more information, please contact a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

Always have work on batteries carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

254

Battery (vehicle)

Breakdown assistance

Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be

absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-

volt battery yourself, please observe the fol-

lowing:

Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away.

Switch off the ignition.

Disconnect the negative terminal first and

then the positive terminal.

The transmission is locked in position j

after disconnecting the battery.

After the work has been done, install the bat-

tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-

minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-

tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are

prohibited when handling the bat-

tery. Avoid creating sparks.

The electrolyte of the battery is cor-

rosive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes

or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing,

especially gloves, apron and face-

guard.

Immediately rinse electrolyte

splashes off with clean water. Con-

tact a physician if necessary.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use batteries which have

been tested and approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide

increased impact protection to prevent vehicle

occupants from suffering acid burns should the

battery be damaged in the event of an accident.

In order for the battery to achieve the maximum

possible service life, it must always be suffi-

ciently charged.

Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may

discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.

In this case, have the battery disconnected at a

qualified specialist workshop. You can also

charge the battery with a special charger rec-

ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a quali-

fied specialist workshop for further information.

Have the battery condition of charge checked

more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for

short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a

lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist

workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle

parked for a long period of time.

When you use the SmartKey in the ignition and

you park the car, remove the SmartKey if you do

not require any electrical consumers. The vehi-

cle will then use very little energy, thus conserv-

ing battery power.

If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if

you reconnect the battery, you will have to:

reset the function for automatically folding

the exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mir-

rors out once (Y page 92)

reset the side windows, see (Y page 78)

Charging the battery

Only use battery chargers with a maximum

charging voltage of 14.4 V.

Only charge the battery using the jump-

starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the

engine compartment (Y page 256).

Open the hood.

Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the same order

as when connecting the donor battery in the

jump-starting procedure (Y page 256).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not

lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it

is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a

battery charger which has been tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger

unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the

charging of the battery in its installed position.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

Battery (vehicle)

255

Breakdown assistance

for further information and availability. Read the

battery charger's operating instructions before

charging the battery.

Do not charge a battery which has been

removed at low temperatures with a battery

charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently

first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can

be shortened and the starting characteristics

impaired, especially at low temperatures.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery

(Y page 254).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

If you want to replace the battery yourself,

observe the following notes:

Always replace a defective battery with a bat-

tery which meets the specific requirements of

the vehicle.

The vehicle is equipped with an AGM (Absorb-

ent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lith-

ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is

only guaranteed with an AGM or lithium-ion

battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you only use batteries

which have been tested and approved for your

vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Use detachable parts such as breather hoses,

angled connecting pieces or terminal covers

from the battery which is to be replaced.

Make sure that the vent hose is always con-

nected to the original opening on the battery

side.

Install any existing or supplied stop plugs.

Otherwise, gases or battery acid could

escape.

Make sure that the detachable parts are con-

nected again in the same way.

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-

partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be

damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device.

If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or

from a donor battery using jumper cables.

The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start

the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.

Observe the following during the jump-starting procedure:

the jumper cables must not come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is

running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts

while the jumper cables are connected to the battery and the jump-starting connection point.

only use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated

terminal clamps.

jump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

you may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

the vehicles must not touch each other.

If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for

a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.

256

Jump-starting

Breakdown assistance

Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Make sure the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off.

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the

SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 111).

Open the hood.

Right-hand-drive vehicle: the jump-starting connection points may be located on the other

side of the vehicle.

Vehicles with a carbon-fiber engine cover

To remove the cover: turn fasteners : a Õ turn and remove.

All vehicles:

Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow.

Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the

jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first.

Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to ground point ? of your vehicle using the

jumper cable. Begin with donor battery B first.

Jump-starting

257

Breakdown assistance

Start the engine of your own vehicle.

Let the engines run for several minutes.

Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle,

e.g. the rear window heating or the lighting.

When the jump-starting procedure is finished: first, remove the jumper cables from ground

point ? and from negative terminal = of the donor battery, and then from positive terminal :

and positive terminal ; of the donor battery. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle

first.

After removing the jumper cables, close cover A of positive terminal :.

Only for vehicles with a carbon-fiber engine cover: insert the cover of the jump-starting

connection point. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned precisely behind the

corresponding recesses in the cover.

Press the fasteners into the mountings. Turn the fasteners by Õ of a turn to engage.

Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

WARNING

The rear axle locks when:

the engine is not running

the engine stalls while the vehicle is being

towed

there is a malfunction in the power supply

or the vehicle's electrical system

There is a risk of an accident.

In the event of a breakdown, you should

always have the vehicle transported.

WARNING

If the brake system or power steering is mal-

functioning and your vehicle is then towed

away, significantly more effort may be

required to steer and brake than is normally

required. There is a risk of an accident.

In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,

make sure that the steering moves freely.

WARNING

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle

and its weight is greater than the permissible

gross weight of your vehicle, the:

the towing eye could detach itself

the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-

over.

There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,

its weight should not be greater than the per-

missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight

of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-

tification plate (Y page 287).

Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop

button when towing the vehicle.

Start the engine and keep it running. The

SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

Set the transmission to i using the E-

SELECT selector lever. Make sure that you

then leave the SmartKey in position 2.

Check the transmission position in the instru-

ment cluster.

Make sure that the electric parking brake is

released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,

visit a qualified specialist workshop.

258

Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance

Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing

eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could

become damaged.

When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is

activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in

certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

these systems in the following or similar sit-

uations:

when towing the vehicle

in the car wash

Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-

poses as this could damage the vehicle. If in

doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

When towing, pull away slowly and

smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the

vehicles could be damaged.

Shift the automatic transmission to position

i and do not open the driver's or front-

passenger door when towing the vehicle

away. Otherwise, the automatic transmission

may shift to position j which can cause

damage to both vehicles.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This

could damage the vehicle.

You may tow the vehicle for a maximum dis-

tance of 30 miles (50 kilometers). A towing

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be

exceeded.

For towing distances over 30 miles

(50 kilometers), the entire vehicle must be

raised and transported.

Observe the transmission fluid temperature

(AMG menu) in the on-board computer when

towing. The transmission oil temperature

must not exceed 250 ‡ (120 †). If this

occurs, you must stop towing immediately.

Tow-starting the vehicle is not permitted.

The transmission may otherwise be damaged.

Also observe the following notes:

If the engine does not start, try jump-starting

it (Y page 256). Tow-starting the vehicle is not

permitted.

If it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,

have it transported to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of

an accident or breakdown, you have the follow-

ing options:

Transporting the vehicle.

As a rule, you should have the vehicle trans-

ported.

Towing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar.

Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. The

engine must be running if you tow the vehicle

with a tow rope or tow bar.

If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,

have it transported on a transporter or trailer.

Observe the display messages in the instrument

cluster.

The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, you:

will not be able to switch on the ignition with

the Start/Stop button

cannot start the engine

cannot release the electric parking brake.

cannot shift the automatic transmission to

position i

Disarm the automatic locking feature before the

vehicle is towed (Y page 73). You could other-

wise be locked out when pushing or towing the

vehicle.

Permitted towing methods

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your

vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than

towing it away.

When towing away, use a towing rope or a tow-

ing bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use

any tow bar systems.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The bracket for the screw-in towing eye is

behind the radiator trim.

Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool

kit (Y page 249).

Towing and tow-starting

259

Breakdown assistance

Pull out cover :.

Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eye

Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.

Fully reinsert cover :.

Put the towing eye back into the vehicle tool

kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground

It is important that you observe the safety

instructions when towing away your vehicle

(Y page 258).

The automatic transmission automatically shifts

to position j when you open the driver's or

front-passenger door or when you remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to

ensure that the automatic transmission stays in

position i when towing away the vehicle, you

must observe the following points:

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. You

must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/

Stop button (Y page 111).

Start the engine and leave it running during

the entire towing procedure.

Depress and hold the brake pedal.

Move the transmission to position i with the

E-SELECT lever.

Check the transmission position using the

indicator in the multifunction display

(Y page 119).

Release the brake pedal.

Release the electric parking brake.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 98).

In order to signal a change of direction when

towing the vehicle with the hazard warning

lamps switched on, use the combination switch

as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps

for the direction of travel flash. After resetting

the combination switch, the hazard warning

lamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the

front and rear axles must be stationary and on

the same transportation vehicle. Positioning

over the connection point of the transport

vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may

otherwise be damaged.

You may only secure the vehicle by the

wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

axle or steering components. Otherwise, the

vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle

onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-

poses.

Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. You

must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/

Stop button (Y page 111).

Start the engine and leave it running during

the entire loading operation.

Move the transmission to position i with the

E-SELECT lever.

Check the transmission position using the

indicator in the multifunction display

(Y page 119).

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the electric parking brake.

Shift the automatic transmission to position

260

Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance

Turn the SmartKey to key position u in the

ignition lock and remove it.

Secure the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency engine

starting)

Vehicles with automatic transmission must

not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-

age the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"

under (Y page 256).

Fuses

Important safety notes

WARNING

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if

you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-

age, the electric cables could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an

accident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specified

new fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the

same rating, which you can recognize by the

color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the

fuse allocation chart.

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the

trunk (Y page 262).

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the

cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-

ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Only use fuses that have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the

correct fuse rating for the system concerned.

Otherwise, components or systems could be

damaged.

Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.

When closing the cover, make sure that it is

lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-

ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-

ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down

faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-

nents on the circuit and their functions stop

operating.

Before changing a fuse

Switch off the engine.

Switch off all electrical consumers.

Open the driver's door.

The on-board electronics are now in key posi-

tion u. This is the same as the key having

been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition

lock:

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 127).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

must be off.

Fuse box in the front passenger foot-

well

The floor panel must be installed properly,

otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the

function of the fuses.

Open the front-passenger door.

To open: remove the carpet over the footrest.

Loosen screws : on the floor panel using a

suitable tool.

Remove the floor panel.

To close: install the floor panel again.

Screw in and tighten screws :.

Put in the carpet and press to secure.

Fuses

261

Breakdown assistance

Fuse box in the rear

To open: from the vehicle interior, lift up

cover : between the roll bars in the direction

of the arrow.

To close: shut cover : in the opposite direc-

tion to the arrow and press to secure.

The fuse allocation chart is located in the

trunk behind the service flap. You can find the

corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on

the fuse allocation chart.

262

Fuses

Breakdown assistance

Important safety notes

WARNING

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,

the wheel brakes or suspension components

may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Always replace wheels and tires with those

that fulfill the specifications of the original

part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to use the

correct:

designation

model

When replacing tires, make sure to use the

correct:

designation

manufacturer

model

WARNING

A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-

ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.

There is a risk of accident.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

do not drive with a flat tire.

immediately replace the flat tire with your

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or

consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:

pay attention to the information and warn-

ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with

run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-

cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-

rectly can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-

shop and inquire about:

suitability

legal stipulations

factory recommendations

Information on the sizes and types of wheels and

tires for your vehicle can be found under

"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 285).

Tire pressure information can be found:

on the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side

(Y page 271)

in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

(Y page 126)

in the "Tire pressure" section

Operation

Information on driving

Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is

heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.

While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises

and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-

ing to one side. This may indicate that the

wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that

a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-

ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to

check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden

tire damage could also be causing the unusual

handling characteristics. If you find no signs of

damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

When parking your vehicle, make sure that the

tires do not get deformed by the curb or other

obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over

obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse

angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels

or tires.

Notes on high performance tires

WARNING

Due to the special tire tread in combination

with the optimized rubber compound, there is

an increased risk of hydroplaning and skid-

ding on damp or wet road surfaces. In addi-

tion, tire traction is significantly reduced at

low outside temperatures and low tire-oper-

ating temperatures. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Activate ESP

and adapt your driving style. At

outside temperatures below 50 ‡(10 †), use

M+S tires.

Operation

263

Wheels and tires

Different driving styles may lead to high tire

wear and the tires may reach the minimum

tire tread depth after only a short time.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

WARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-

sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of

your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage

and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Check wheels and tires for damage at least once

a month. Check wheels and tires after driving

off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels

can cause a loss of tire pressure.

Pay particular attention to damage such as:

Cuts in the tires

Punctures in the tires

Tears in the tires

Bulges on tires

Deformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Regularly check the tire tread depth and the

condition of the tread across the whole width of

all tires (Y page 264). If necessary, turn the

front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the

inner side of the tire surface.

All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the

valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount

anything onto the valve other than the standard

valve cap or other valve caps approved by

Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any

other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure

monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-

ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-

sure as necessary (Y page 266).

The service life of tires depends, among other

things, on the following factors:

Driving style

Tire pressure

Distance covered

Notes on tire tread

WARNING

Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.

The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.

This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk

of hydroplaning increases, in particular where

speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-

ditions. There is a risk of accident.

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires

may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-

ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you

should regularly check the tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the entire

width of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:

Summer tires: â in (3 mm)

M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before

the legally prescribed limit for the minimum

tire tread depth is reached.

Marking : shows where the bar indicator

(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire

tread.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.

Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.

They are visible once a tread depth of approx-

imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this

is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be

replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing

tires

Only mount tires and wheels of the same type

and make.

264

Operation

Wheels and tires

Exception: it is permissible to mount a differ-

ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.

Only mount tires of the correct size onto the

wheels.

Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the

first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only

reach their full performance after this dis-

tance.

Do not drive with tires which have too little

tread depth. This significantly reduces the

traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

Replace the tires after six years at the latest,

regardless of wear.

Winter operation

General notes

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"

section (Y page 281).

Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer

tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and

braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle

to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold

temperatures could cause cracks to form,

thereby damaging the tires permanently.

Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for

this type of damage.

M+S tires

WARNING

M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than

ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter

and do not provide sufficient traction. There is

a risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in

(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter

tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are

identified by the M+S marking.

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake

symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide

the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

Only these tires will allow driving safety systems

such as ABS and ESP

to function optimally in

winter. These tires have been developed specif-

ically for driving in snow.

Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all

wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-

tics.

Always observe the maximum permissible

speed specified for the M+S tires you have

mounted.

When you have mounted the M+S tires:

Check the tire pressures (Y page 266).

Restart the tire pressure monitor

(Y page 271).

Snow chains

WARNING

If snow chains are installed to the front

wheels, they may drag against the vehicle

body or chassis components. This could

cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.

There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:

never install snow chains to the front

wheels

always install snow chains in pairs to the

rear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use snow chains that have

been specially approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding

standard of quality. For more information,

please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear

the following points in mind:

Snow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Permissible

wheel/tire combinations (Y page 285).

Only use snow chains when driving on roads

completely covered by snow. Remove the

snow chains as soon as possible when you

come to a road that is not snow-covered.

Winter operation

265

Wheels and tires

Local regulations may restrict the use of snow

chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if

you wish to mount snow chains.

do not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 31 mph (50 km/h).

You may wish to deactivate ESP

(Y page 63)

when pulling away with snow chains mounted.

You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a

controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-

ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the

following risks:

the tires may burst, especially as the load

and vehicle speed increase.

the tires may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tire

traction.

the driving characteristics, as well as steer-

ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures

and check the pressure of all the tires includ-

ing the spare wheel:

monthly, at least

if the load changes

before beginning a long journey

under different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Information

placard and tire pressure table shown here are

examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-

cle-specific and may deviate from the data

shown here. The tire pressure specifications

that are valid for your vehicle can be found on

the Tire and Loading Information placard and

tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes

The recommended tire pressures for the tires

mounted at the factory can be found on the

labels described here.

Further information on tire pressures can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on

the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 271).

The Tire and Loading Information placard con-

tains the recommended tire pressures for cold

tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid

for the maximum permissible load and up to the

maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel

filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires

permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see

illustration (example).

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire

pressure information following is only valid for

that tire size.

266

Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

If the tire pressures have been set to the lower

values for lighter loads and/or lower road

speeds, the pressures should be reset to the

higher values:

if you want to drive with an increased load

and/or

if you want to drive at higher road speeds

The tire pressures for increased loads and/or

higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure

table, may have a negative effect on driving

comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can

lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud-

den loss of pressure.

For more information, contact a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

WARNING

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the

wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire

pressure that is too low may result in a tire

blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

Check the tire for foreign objects.

Check whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-

tact a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire

valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressure

loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-

sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This

can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a

risk of an accident.

Only screw the standard valve cap or other

valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for

your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does

not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire

pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-

tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure

can be checked in the on-board computer.

The tire temperature and pressure increase

when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent

on the driving speed and the load.

Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-

sures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

if the vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours

and

if the vehicle has not been driven further than

1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the

outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the

tire load. If the tire temperature changes by

18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by

approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take

this into account when checking the pressure of

warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. If

you check the tire pressure when the tires are

warm, the resulting value will be higher than if

the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not

reduce the tire pressure to the value specified

for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise

be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires:

on the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side

in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

(Y page 126).

Tire pressure

267

Wheels and tires

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

WARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can over-

heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,

they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-

ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-

ing properties and the driving characteristics.

There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:

overheat, leading to tire defects

adversely affect handling

wear excessively and/or unevenly

have an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

WARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst

because they are damaged more easily by

road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they

also suffer from irregular wear, which can

severely impair the braking properties and the

driving characteristics. There is a risk of an

accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:

increase the braking distance

adversely affect handling

wear excessively and/or unevenly

have an adverse effect on ride comfort

be more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

Example: maximum permissible tire pres-

sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire

inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-

mended tire pressure for your vehicle when

adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 266).

The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-

cific and may deviate from the values in the

illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes

Observe the notes on tire pressure

(Y page 266).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your

vehicle can be found:

on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information

placard on the B-pillar

in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

(Y page 126)

in the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually

To determine and set the correct tire pressure,

proceed as follows:

Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be

checked.

Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the

valve.

Read the tire pressure and compare it to the

recommended value on the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the tire pressure table

(Y page 266).

268

Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire

pressure to the recommended value.

If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To

do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,

using the tip of a pen for example. Then check

the tire pressure again using the tire pressure

checker.

Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes

If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-

cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire

pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-

itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or

more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only

functions if the corresponding sensors are

installed in all wheels.

Information on tire pressures is displayed in the

multifunction display. After a few minutes of

driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is

shown in the ServiceService menu of the multifunction

display; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer to

the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"

section (Y page 270).

Important safety notes

WARNING

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked at least once every two

weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

on the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-

sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If

your vehicle has tires of a different size than

the size indicated on the Tire and Loading

Information placard or, if available, the tire

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires

are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,

you should stop and check your tires as soon

as possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-

flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's

handling and stopping ability. Please note that

the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if

underinflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-

sure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-

tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp

will flash for approximately a minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-

cle is started as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-

minated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of incom-

patible replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

Tire pressure

269

Wheels and tires

ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire

pressure to that recommended for cold tires

which is suitable for the operating situation

(Y page 266). Note that the correct tire pressure

for the current operating situation must first be

taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-

stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning

threshold for the warning message is aligned to

the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire

pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of

the cold tires (Y page 271). The current pres-

sures are saved as new reference values. As a

result, a warning message will appear if the tire

pressure drops significantly.

The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of

an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the

notes on the recommended tire pressure

(Y page 266).

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you

of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is

penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a

sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a

halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering

movements.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning

lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating

pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the

warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates

whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire

pressure monitor is malfunctioning:

if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire

pressure on one or more tires is significantly

too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-

functioning.

if the warning lamp flashes for around a

minute and then remains lit constantly, the

tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message

appears in the multifunction display. Observe

the information on display messages

(Y page 192).

It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction

of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A

malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-

sure warning lamp flashing for approximately

one minute and then remaining lit. When the

malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure

warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of

driving.

The tire pressure values indicated by the on-

board computer may differ from those meas-

ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The

tire pressures shown by the on-board computer

refer to those measured at sea level. At high

altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a

pressure gage are higher than those shown by

the on-board computer. In this case, do not

reduce the tire pressures.

The operation of the tire pressure monitor can

be affected by interference from radio transmit-

ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way

radios) that may be being operated in or near the

vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-

cally

Switch on the ignition (Y page 111).

Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the list of menus.

Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to

select the ServiceService menu.

Press a.

Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐Tire Pres‐

suresure.

Press a.

The current tire pressure of each tire is shown

in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than

20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will be

displayed after driving a few minutesdisplayed after driving a few minutes

message appears.

After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-

itor automatically detects new wheels or new

sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire

pressure value to the individual wheels is not

possible, the TireTire PressurePressure MonitorMonitor ActiveActive

message is shown instead of the tire pressure

display. The tire pressures are already being

monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-

sages

If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure

loss in one or more tires, a warning message is

shown in the multifunction display. The yellow

tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.

If the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressure

message appears in the multifunction display,

the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.

270

Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

The tire pressure must be corrected when the

opportunity arises.

If the Check TiresCheck Tires message appears in the

multifunction display, the tire pressure in at

least one tire has dropped significantly. The

tires must be checked.

If the WarningWarning TireTire MalfunctionMalfunction message

appears in the multifunction display, the tire

pressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-

denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in the

display messages in the "Tires" section

(Y page 192).

If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,

the tire pressures may be displayed for the

wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified

after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-

sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all

existing warning messages are deleted and the

warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-

rently set tire pressures as the reference values

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure

monitor will automatically detect the new refer-

ence values after you have changed the tire

pressure. However, you can also set reference

values manually as described here. The tire

pressure monitor then monitors the new tire

pressure values.

Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-

ded for the corresponding driving situation on

the Tire and Loading Information placard on

the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 266).

You can find more tire pressure values for

various operating conditions in the tire pres-

sure table inside the fuel filler flap

(Y page 266).

Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on

all four wheels.

Switch on the ignition (Y page 111).

Press ò on the steering wheel to call up

the list of menus.

Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to

select the ServiceService menu.

Press a.

Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐Tire Pres‐

suresure.

Press a.

The current tire pressure for each wheel or

the Tire pressure will be displayedTire pressure will be displayed

after driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes message

will be displayed in the multifunction display.

Press :.

The UseUse CurrentCurrent PressuresPressures asas NewNew Ref‐Ref‐

erenceerence ValuesValues message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

Press a.

The TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitor RestartedRestarted mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

After driving for a few minutes, the system

checks whether the current tire pressures are

within the specified range. The new tire pres-

sures are then accepted as reference values

and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

Press %.

The tire pressure values stored at the last

restart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

WARNING

Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a

blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the

steering and driving characteristics and lead

to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.

Observe the load rating of the tires. The load

rating must be at least half of the GAWR of

your vehicle. Never overload the tires by

exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the

maximum possible load.

(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire

and Loading Information placard shows the

permissible number of vehicle occupants

and the maximum permissible load of the

vehicle. It also contains details of the tire

Loading the vehicle

271

Wheels and tires

sizes and corresponding pressures for tires

mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-

pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-

tification plate informs you of the gross

vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the

vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the

fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-

mation about the maximum gross axle

weight rating on the front and rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is

the maximum weight that can be carried by

one axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceed

the maximum gross vehicle weight or the

maximum gross axle weight rating for the

front or rear axle.

B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible mass.

Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight : is listed on the Tire and Loading

Information placard: "The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load

and luggage must not exceed the specified

value.

The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration

are examples. The maximum permissible load

is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the

data shown here. The maximum permissible

load that applies for your vehicle can be found

on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-

tion placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats : indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to

travel in the vehicle. This information can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-

ard.

The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration

are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-

specific and can differ from the details shown.

The number of seats in your vehicle can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information

placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions

The following steps have been developed as

required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-

suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle

Safety Act of 1966".

Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never

272

Loading the vehicle

Wheels and tires

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information placard.

Step 2: Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or

XXX lbs.

Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-

city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals

1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-

sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

Step 5: Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-

culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3

The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying

seating configurations and different numbers and weights of vehicle occupants. The following

examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure

you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-

mation placard (Y page 271).

The higher the weight of all the vehicle occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum

weight of vehicle occu-

pants and load (data

from the Tire and Load-

ing Information plac-

ard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people in

the vehicle (driver and

occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the

occupants

Front: 2

Rear: 3

Front: 1

Rear: 2

Front: 1

Loading the vehicle

273

Wheels and tires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Weight of the occu-

pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Occupant 2: 180 lbs

(82 kg)

Occupant 3: 160 lbs

(73 kg)

Occupant 4: 140 lbs

(63 kg)

Occupant 5: 120 lbs

(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs

(91 kg)

Occupant 2: 190 lbs

(86 kg)

Occupant 3: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Gross weight of all

occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maxi-

mum gross vehicle

weight rating from the

Tire and Loading Infor-

mation placard minus

the gross weight of all

occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

750 lbs (340 kg) =

750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

540 lbs (245 kg)

=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

150 lbs (68 kg) =

1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate

Even if you have calculated the total load care-

fully, you should still make sure that the gross

vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight

rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on

the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on

the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 271).

Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the

vehicle, all vehicle occupants, load and trailer

load/noseweight (if applicable) must not

exceed the gross vehicle weight rating.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-

mum permissible load that can be carried by one

axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the

gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle

weight rating, have your loaded vehicle (includ-

ing driver, vehicle occupants, load and full trailer

load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle

weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-

ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-

ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.

government specifications. Their purpose is to

provide drivers with uniform reliable information

on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers

have to grade tires using three performance fac-

274

All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and

= temperature grade. These regulations do not

apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in

North America are provided with the corre-

sponding quality grading markings on the side-

wall of the tire.

Quality grades can be found, where applicable,

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width.

Example:

Treadwear grade: 200

Traction grade: AA

Temperature grade: A

All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-

utory safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-

cific and may deviate from the values in the

illustration.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.

government course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half times as well

on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon

the actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices

and differences in road characteristics and cli-

mate.

Traction

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-

nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-

acteristics.

Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the

tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-

ured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread

depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.

Observe the legally required minimum tire tread

depth (Y page 264). Winter tires can reduce the

braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in

comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-

tance is still much further than on surfaces that

are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-

priate care when driving.

Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)

(Y page 265).

Temperature

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause excessive heat

build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimum required by law.

All about wheels and tires

275

Wheels and tires

Tire labeling

Overview

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard

(Y page 279)

;

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Y page 278)

Maximum tire load (Y page 278)

Maximum tire pressure (Y page 268)

Manufacturer

Tire material (Y page 279)

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 276)

Load index (Y page 278)

Tire name

The markings described above are on the tire in

addition to the tire name (sales designation) and

the manufacturer's name.

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating

WARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-

city and the approved maximum speed could

lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There

is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

tire load rating and speed rating required for

your vehicle.

Tire width

;

Nominal aspect ratio in %

Tire code

Rim diameter

Load bearing index

Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer's

standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may

not contain any letters or may contain one letter

that precedes the size description.

If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-

tion (as shown above): these are passenger

vehicle tires according to European manufac-

turing standards.

If "P" precedes the size description: these are

passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-

ufacturing standards.

If "LT" precedes the size description: these are

light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing

standards.

If "T" precedes the size description: compact

emergency wheels with high tire pressure that

are only designed for temporary use in an emer-

gency.

Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire

width in millimeters.

Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size

ratio between the tire height and tire width and

is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-

ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.

Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.

"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-

onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum design speed

of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in

276

All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

the size description, depending on the manu-

facturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter

of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim

flange. The rim diameter is specified in

inches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a

numerical code that specifies the maximum

load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified load limit. The maximum permissible

load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on

the driver's side (Y page 271).

Example:

Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum

load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.

For further information on the maximum tire

load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 278).

For further information on the load bearing

index, see "Load index" (Y page 278).

Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the

approved maximum speed of the tire.

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe

the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your

driving style to the traffic conditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

Optionally, tires with a maximum design

speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have

"ZR" in the size description, depending on the

manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

The service specification is made up of load-

bearing index A and speed rating B.

If the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service specifications,

ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out

the maximum design speed.

If a service specification is available, the max-

imum speed is limited according to the speed

rating in the service specification. Example:

245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is

the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-

resents the speed rating. The maximum

design speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph

(300 km/h).

The size description for all tires with maxi-

mum design speeds of over 186 mph

(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the ser-

vice specification must be given in brackets.

Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating

"(Y)" indicates that the maximum design

speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h).

To find out the maximum design speed, ask

the tire manufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires. In

addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also

have the i snowflake symbol on the tire

wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-

ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-

tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of

Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on

snow. They have been especially developed

for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-

cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph

(210 km/h).

Or M+S i for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires

277

Wheels and tires

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory

may be higher than the maximum design speed

permitted by the electronic speed limiter.

Make sure that your tires have the required

speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The

required speed rating for your vehicle can be

found in the "Tires" section (Y page 285).

Further information about reading tire data can

be obtained from any qualified specialist work-

shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load

index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall

of the tire. You will find this after the letter that

identifies the speed rating (Y page 276).

If no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standard load

(SL) tire

XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire

Light Load: represents a light load tire

C, D, E: represents a load range that depends

on the maximum load that the tire can carry at

a certain pressure

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified load limit. The maximum permissible

load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on

the driver's side (Y page 271).

The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-

cific and may deviate from the values in the

illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-

ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on

the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders

to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-

relevant matters. It makes it possible for the

purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.

The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-

tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and

manufacturing date A.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

symbol : marks that the tire complies with the

278

All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-

portation.

Manufacturer identification code: manufac-

turer identification code ; provides details on

the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code

with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code

with four symbols.

For further information about retreaded tires,

see (Y page 285).

Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by

the manufacturer as a code to describe specific

characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A

provides information about the age of a tire. The

first and second positions represent the week of

manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-

endar week. Positions three and four represent

the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that

is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32

in 2014.

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord

and the number of layers in sidewall : and

under tire tread ;.

Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used

Describes the number of plies or the number of

layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread

and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,

polyester and other materials.

Bar

Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds

per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)

are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the

U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the vehicle

is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires

with regards to tread quality, tire traction and

temperature characteristics. The quality grad-

ing assessment is made by the manufacturer

following specifications from the U.S. govern-

ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of

the tire.

Recommended tire pressures

The recommended tire pressure applies to the

tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placard con-

tains the recommended tire pressures for cold

tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-

mum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-

ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-

ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-

ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional

equipment

The combined weight of all standard and

optional equipment available for the vehicle,

regardless of whether it is actually installed on

the vehicle or not.

Rim

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is

mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight

rating. The actual load on an axle must never

exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross

axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle

identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's

side.

All about wheels and tires

279

Wheels and tires

Speed rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification.

It specifies the speed range for which the tire is

approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of

the vehicle with fuel, tools, the spare wheel,

accessories installed, vehicle occupants, lug-

gage and the drawbar noseweight if applicable.

The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the

gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified

on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar

on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross

weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the

vehicle including all accessories, vehicle occu-

pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-

weight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight

rating is specified on the vehicle identification

plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The maximum weight is the sum of:

the curb weight of the vehicle

the weight of the accessories

the load limit

the weight of the factory installed optional

equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-

sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is

bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of

1 bar.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load

index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of

the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity

of the tire more precisely.

Curb weight

The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment

including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-

tem and optional equipment if these are instal-

led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-

gers or luggage.

Maximum load rating

The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-

sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is

approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by

dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by

two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio

Relationship between tire height and tire width

in percent.

Tire pressure

This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-

ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-

face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per

square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.

The tire pressure should only be corrected when

the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure

The tires are cold:

if the vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours

and

if the vehicle has not been driven further than

1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact with

the road.

Bead

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely

on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the

bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from

the wheel rim.

Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the

bead.

280

All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Weight of optional extras

The combined weight of those optional extras

that weigh more than the replaced standard

parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These

optional extras, such as high-performance

brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-volt-

age battery, are not included in the curb weight

and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is a unique identifier which can be used by

a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example

for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-

chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-

er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and

the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index

The load bearing index (also load index) is a code

that contains the maximum load bearing capa-

city of a tire.

Traction

Traction is the result of friction between the tires

and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-

uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level

with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)

has been reached.

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their

designated seating positions.

Total load limit

Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg

(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in

the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire

The "Breakdown assistance" section

(Y page 250) contains information and notes on

how to deal with a flat tire.

Rotating the wheels

WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels may

severely impair the driving characteristics if

the wheels or tires have different dimensions.

The wheel brakes or suspension components

may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-

dent.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels

and tires are of the same dimensions.

On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure

monitor, electronic components are located

in the wheel.

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near

the valve. This could damage the electronic

components.

Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safety

notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section

(Y page 282).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tires

differ, depending on the operating conditions.

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern

has formed on the tires. Front tires typically

wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in

the center.

On vehicles that have the same size front and

rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-

ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's

warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no

warranty book is available, the tires should be

rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to

10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may

be required earlier. Do not change the direction

of wheel rotation.

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the

brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-

ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the

tire pressure monitor if necessary.

Direction of rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have

additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-

planing. These advantages can only be gained if

the tires are installed corresponding to the

direction of rotation.

Changing a wheel

281

Wheels and tires

An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its

correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels

Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires

from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground.

Apply the electric parking brake manually.

Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead

position.

Shift the transmission to position j.

Switch off the engine.

With KEYLESS-GO start function or vehi-

cles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's

door.

The vehicle electronics are now in key posi-

tion u. This is the same as the SmartKey

having been removed.

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

If included in the vehicle equipment, remove

the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it

can be found in the tire-change tool kit

(Y page 249).

The folding wheel chock is an additional safety

measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling

away, for example when changing a wheel.

Fold both plates up :.

Fold out lower plate ;.

Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the

openings in base plate =.

Place chocks or other suitable items under

the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-

nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly at the

appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

There is a risk of injury.

Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-

ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

must be positioned vertically, directly under

the jacking point of the vehicle.

Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you

could damage the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising the vehi-

cle:

To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-

cific jack that has been tested and approved

by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

The jack is designed only to raise and hold the

vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being

changed. It must not be used for performing

maintenance work under the vehicle.

Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-

hill slopes.

282

Changing a wheel

Wheels and tires

Before raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-

ing away by applying the parking brake and

inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the

parking brake while the vehicle is raised.

The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,

flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a

slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be

used, e.g. rubber mats.

Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects

as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not

be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity

due to the restricted height.

Make sure that the distance between the

underside of the tires and the ground does not

exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).

Do not place your hands or feet under the

raised vehicle.

Do not lie under the vehicle.

Do not start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.

Do not open or close a door or the trunk lid

when the vehicle is raised.

Make sure that no persons are present in the

vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with hub caps: the hub cap covers

the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the

wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap.

To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench

= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 249).

Position socket ; on hub cap :.

Position lug wrench = on socket ;.

Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : coun-

ter-clockwise and remove it.

To install: before installing, check hub cap :

and the wheel area for soiling and clean if

necessary.

Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in

the right position.

Position socket ; on hub cap :.

Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and

tighten hub cap :.

The tightening torque must be

18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

Note that the hub cap should be tightened

to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the

wheel you wish to change by about one full

turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking point is centered between the front

and rear wheel arches (arrow).

Changing a wheel

283

Wheels and tires

Position jack A at jacking point ?.

Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-

tioned directly under jacking point ?.

Turn crank B clockwise until jack A sits

completely on jacking point ? and the base

of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

Turn crank B until the tire is raised a maxi-

mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel

AMG ceramic high performance composite

brake system:

When detaching or attaching the wheel, the

wheel rim may hit against the ceramic brake

disc and damage it.

Proceed with caution and seek the assistance

of a second person.

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty

surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could

otherwise be damaged when you screw them

in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for as

long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying

any external force on the brake disks. This could

impair the level of comfort when braking.

Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.

Screw alignment bolt : into the thread

instead of the wheel bolt.

Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

WARNING

Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged

wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel

bolts to come loose. As a result, you could

lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of

accident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of

damage to the threads, contact a qualified

specialist workshop immediately. Have the

damaged wheel bolts or hub threads

replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip

over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section

(Y page 281).

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed

for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-

sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use wheel bolts which have been approved

for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective

wheel.

AMG ceramic high performance composite

brake system:

When detaching or attaching the wheel, the

wheel rim may hit against the ceramic brake

disc and damage it.

Proceed with caution and seek the assistance

of a second person.

To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold

the wheel securely against the wheel hub

while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

284

Changing a wheel

Wheels and tires

Wheel bolt

Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-

faces.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-

ment bolt and push it on.

Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-

tight.

Unscrew the alignment bolt.

Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight.

Lowering the vehicle

WARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts

and bolts are not tightened to the specified

tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.

Have the tightening torque immediately

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

after a wheel is changed.

Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise

until the vehicle is once again standing firmly

on the ground.

Place the jack to one side.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise

pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).

The specified tightening torque is 133 lb-ft

(180 Nm).

Turn the jack back to its initial position.

Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools

in the trunk again.

Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted

wheel and adjust it if necessary.

Observe the recommended tire pressure

(Y page 266).

When you are driving with the emergency spare

wheel mounted, the tire pressure monitor can-

not function reliably. Only restart the tire pres-

sure monitor when the defective wheel has been

replaced with a new wheel. All wheels mounted

must be equipped with functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can obtain information regarding permitted

wheel/tire combinations at a qualified special-

ist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations

285

Wheels and tires

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use tires and wheels

which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz

specifically for your vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted for

use with the control systems, such as ABS or

ESP

, and are marked as follows:

MO = Mercedes-Benz Original

MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)

MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-

tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may

only be used on wheels that have been spe-

cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested

and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain

characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise

emissions or fuel consumption, may other-

wise be adversely affected. In addition, when

driving with a load, tire dimension variations

could cause the tires to come into contact

with the bodywork and axle components. This

could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-

cle.

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-

age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or

accessories other than those tested and

approved.

Information on tires, wheels and approved

combinations can be obtained from any quali-

fied specialist workshop.

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-

ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-

ous damage cannot always be detected on

retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz

cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded

tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if

you have no information about their previous

usage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-

ating conditions can be found:

on the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side

in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-

sures under various operating conditions

(Y page 266).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when

the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance

recommendations of the tire manufacturer in

the vehicle document wallet.

Notes on equipping the vehicle:

Always mount tires of the same size across an

axle (left/right)

Always mount the same type of tires on all

wheels at a given time (summer tires, winter

tires)

Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-

ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.

286

Wheel and tire combinations

Wheels and tires

Information regarding technical data

The data stated here specifically refers to a

vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the

data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-

ics

Have the engine electronics and associated

parts, such as control units, sensors, actuat-

ing components or electric cables serviced

only at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehi-

cle components may otherwise wear more

quickly and the vehicle's operating permit

may be invalidated.

Installing wireless devices and mobile

phones

WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from two-way

radios can interfere with the vehicle electron-

ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-

rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the

operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk

of an accident.

You should have all work on electrical and

electronic components carried out at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

WARNING

If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in

the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation

may interfere with the vehicle electronics, for

example if:

the two-way radio is not connected to an

exterior antenna

the exterior antenna is not correctly moun-

ted or is not low-reflection

This could jeopardize the operating safety of

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior antenna

installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Always connect two-way radios to the low-

reflection exterior antenna when operating in

the vehicle.

The operating permit may be invalidated if

the instructions for installation and use of

two-way radios are not observed.

In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:

only approved wavebands may be used.

observe the maximum permissible output

in these wavebands.

only approved antenna positions may be

used.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation

may cause damage to your health and the health

of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into

account current scientific discussions relating

to the possible health hazards that may result

from electromagnetic fields.

The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:

two-way radios with a maximum transmission

output of up to 100 mW

mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-

cle identification number (VIN)

Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Identification plates

287

Technical data

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

VIN

;

Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

VIN

;

Paint code

The data shown on the vehicle identification

plate is used only as an example. This data is

different for every vehicle and can deviate

from the data shown here. You can find the

data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle

identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost

position.

Fold floor covering : upwards.

You will see VIN ;.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca-

tions:

on the lower edge of windshield =

on the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 287)

Engine number

Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali-

fornian emissions standards

;

VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

288

Identification plates

Technical data

Service products and filling capaci-

ties

Important safety notes

WARNING

Service products may be poisonous and haz-

ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

Comply with instructions on the use, storage

and disposal of service products on the labels

of the respective original containers. Always

store service products sealed in their original

containers. Always keep service products out

of the reach of children.

Environmental note

Dispose of service products in an environ-

mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:

Fuels

Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

Coolant

Brake fluid

Windshield washer fluid

Climate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must match.

Only use products recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of

products which have not been recommended is

not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or

goodwill gestures. They are listed in this

Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appro-

priate section.

Information on tested and approved products

can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center or on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

You can recognize service products approved by

Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on

the containers:

MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations indi-

cate a level of quality or a specification in

accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB

229.5). They have not necessarily been

approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Other identifications, for example:

0 W-30

5 W-30

5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and

explosion by improper handling of fuel.

You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking

and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition

before refueling and, if present, switch off the

auxiliary heating.

WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

Wash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-

out delay.

If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-

ing.

Immediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models

19.8 US gal

(75.0 l)

Service products and filling capacities

289

Technical data

Model Of which

reserve

All models

Approx.

3.2 US gal

(12.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade

Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition

if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could

result in damage to the fuel system and the

engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop

and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

completely.

Only refuel using unleaded premium grade

gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.

Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can

refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

Only use the fuel recommended. Operating

the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-

age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust

system.

Never refuel using:

Diesel

Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100

Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100

Gasoline with metalliferous additives

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-

mended for your vehicle.

To ensure the longevity and full perform-

ance of the engine, only premium-grade

unleaded gasoline may be used.

If premium-grade unleaded gasoline is

unavailable and you have to refuel with regu-

lar unleaded gasoline, observe the following

precautions:

Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular

unleaded gasoline and add the rest as soon

as possible with premium-grade unleaded

gasoline.

Do not drive at the maximum design speed.

Avoid sudden acceleration and engine

speeds over 3000 rpm.

Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or unleaded

gasoline with additives can be used. The con-

centration of additives in the fuel, however,

must not exceed 10%, for example:

Ethanol

TAME

ETBE

IPA

TBA

For MTBE, the concentration should not exceed

15%.

The concentration of methanol in gasoline,

including other additives, must not exceed 3%.

All of these blends must fulfill the fuel require-

ments, for example:

knock resistance

boiling point

vapor pressure

For further information, consult a qualified

specialist workshop or visit

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Information on refueling (Y page 126).

Additives

Operating the engine with fuel additives

added later can lead to engine failure. Do not

mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not

include additives for the removal and preven-

tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be

mixed with additives recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions

for use on the product label. More information

about recommended additives can be

obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-

ded fuels that have additives.

The fuel quality available in some countries may

not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the

fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,

and in consultation with an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed

with the cleaning additive recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes

and mixing ratios specified on the container.

290

Service products and filling capacities

Technical data

Engine oil

General notes

Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with

specifications deviating from those expressly

required for the prescribed service intervals.

Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in

order to set replacement intervals longer than

those prescribed. This could otherwise cause

damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-

treatment.

Follow the instructions on the service interval

display for changing the engine oil. This could

otherwise cause damage to the engine or

exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the important

safety notes on service products (Y page 289).

The engine oils are matched to the performance

of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.

You should therefore only use engine oils and oil

filters that are approved for vehicles with main-

tenance systems.

For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,

consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Or visit the website

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

The table shows which engine oils have been

approved for your vehicle.

MB-Freigabe or

MB-Approval

All models

229.5, 229.51

MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-

ers.

Filling capacities

The following values refer to an oil change

including the oil filter.

Capacity

All models

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Additives

Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

WARNING

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture

from the air. This lowers the boiling point of

the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake

fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the

brake system when the brakes are applied

hard. This would impair braking efficiency.

There is a risk of an accident.

You should have the brake fluid renewed at

the specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-

vice products when handling brake fluid

(Y page 289).

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 331.0.

Information about approved brake fluid can be

obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or

on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop in accordance

with the replacement intervals and the

replacement confirmed in the service report.

Service products and filling capacities

291

Technical data

Coolant

Important safety notes

WARNING

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-

ponents in the engine compartment, it may

ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Let the engine cool down before you add anti-

freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled

next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the

antifreeze from components before starting

the engine.

Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You

could otherwise damage the engine.

You can find additional notes on the coolant in

the following places:

in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1

on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com

on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app

a qualified specialized workshop

Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even

in countries where high temperatures prevail.

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not

sufficiently protected from corrosion and

overheating.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop and the replace-

ment confirmed in the service report.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-

vice products when handling coolant

(Y page 289).

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-

freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-

lowing tasks:

anti-corrosion protection

antifreeze protection

raising the boiling point

If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to

-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant

during operation is approximately 266 ‡

(130 †).

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor

concentration in the engine cooling system

should:

be at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down to

approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).

not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down

to -49 ‡[-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be

dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/

corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance

with MB Specifications for Service Products

310.1.

The coolant is checked with every maintenance

interval at a qualified specialist workshop.

When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled

with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate

antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

The coolant is checked at specified intervals

at a qualified specialist workshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

Mercedes-AMG GT

Roadster

13.5 US qt (12.8 l)

Mercedes–AMG GT

C Roadster

14.6 US qt (13.8 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam-

mable. If windshield washer concentrate gets

onto hot components of the engine or the

exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of

fire and injury.

Make sure that windshield washer concen-

trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler

neck.

Only use washer fluid which is suitable for

lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Win-

terFit. Unsuitable washer fluid may damage

the lamp lenses of the headlamps.

292

Service products and filling capacities

Technical data

Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit

washer fluid should be mixed together. The

spray nozzles may otherwise become

blocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-

wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.

At temperatures above freezing:

Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of

water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB

SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:

Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of

water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.

For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-

mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-

merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all

year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes

The instruction label regarding the refrigerant

type used can be found on the radiator cross

member. Further information can be found in

the currently valid service information.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or

replacing component parts, may only be carried

out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-

cable regulations must be adhered to, SAE

standard J639 included.

Always have work on the climate control system

carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label

Warning symbol

;

Refrigerant filling capacity

Applicable standards

PAG oil part number

Type of refrigerant

Warning symbol : advises you about:

Possible dangers

Having service work carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Missing values were not available at time of

going to print.

Vehicle data

General notes

Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

The heights specified may vary as a result of:

Tires

Load

Condition of the suspension

Optional equipment

Optional equipment reduces the maximum

payload

Vehicle data

293

Technical data

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time of

going to print.

:: Opening height

Rear spoiler retrac-

ted (all models)

66.5 in (1688 mm)

Rear spoiler retrac-

ted, Mercedes‑AMG

GT C Roadster

66.5 in (1690 mm)

Rear spoiler exten-

ded,

Mercedes‑AMG

GT Roadster

66.7 in (1696 mm)

Rear spoiler exten-

ded,

Mercedes‑AMG

GT C Roadster

66.8 in (1697 mm)

All models

Vehicle length

179.4 in

(4558 mm)

Vehicle length,

Mercedes‑AMG

GT C Roadster

179.7 in

(4565 mm)

Vehicle width including

outside mirrors

81.7 in

(2075 mm)

Vehicle width without

exterior mirrors

76.3 in

(1939 mm)

Vehicle width excluding

exterior mirrors,

Mercedes‑AMG

GT C Roadster

78.5 in

(1996 mm)

All models

Vehicle height

49.5 in

(1259 mm)

Vehicle height,

Mercedes‑AMG

GT C Roadster

49.6 in

(1260 mm)

Wheelbase

103.5 in

(2630 mm)

Turning radius

480.3 in

(12.20 m)

Maximum trunk load

294

Vehicle data

Technical data

295

296

Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG GT C Roadster Car

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG GT C Roadster Questions and Answers

Related Products

INFANS TQ10055BK 12V Electric Kids Ride On Car, Licensed Mercedes Benz GLA45 Toy Car

Mercedes-Benz 2019 Car

Mercedes-Benz AMG Car

Mercedes-Benz 2019 AMG Car

Mercedes-Benz 2019 GLA Car

COSTWAY TQ10010 6V Mercedes Benz Kids Ride on Car